01 ETR300R Manual Control Ver1.48 20140321

Release Date: Mar. 2014 / Manual Revision: 1.
48
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

USER’S MANUAL
ENTEC ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Copyright © 2009 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved. Forerunner Distribution & Automation
RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R http://www.entecene.co.kr
Release Note:
[Apr. 2012] Ver1.40

Release note starts from version 1.40
[May. 2012] Ver1.41

Add “CLPU-TYPE 2 Setup” in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”.
[Aug. 2012] Ver1.42

Change the range and step of “M.A.D(Deg)” setting in “GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING /
SYNCHROCHECK” menu(in “6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25)”).
[Aug. 2012] Ver1.43

Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.4 upgrading.
1. Change “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection” in “2.4. Protection
Elements”.
2. Change “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection” in “2.4.
Protection Elements”.
3. Change “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection” in “2.4.
Protection Elements”.
4. Change “Live Load Blocking” in “2.5. Monitoring”.
5. Change the description of “Frequency” setting in “6.1.1. Power Line”.
6. Change the description of “Master IP Oct 1~4” settings in “6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup”.
7. Change the step of “DCD CheckOut” setting in “6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup”.
8. Change the range of “TX PostDelay” setting in “6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup”.
9. Change the description of “IP Address Oct 1~4”, “Gateway Oct 1~4” and “Subnet Mask Oct
1~4” settings in “6.2.2.3. PORT3(EHTERNET) Setup”.
10. Change the default of “Wave Capture” and “Wave S/R” settings in “6.3. Event Recorder”.
11. Change the range of “M.A.D(Deg)” setting in “SYNCHROCHECK” menu.
- Change “Synchronism” in “2.5. Monitoring”.
- Change the range of “M.A.D(Deg)” setting in “6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25)”.
12. Change the default of “Level” setting in “PQM / INTERRUPT” menu.
- Change “Power Quality Monitoring” in “2.5. Monitoring”.
- Change the default of “Level” setting in “6.4.5.2. Interrupt”.
13. Change the default and description of “Level” setting in “6.4.5.10. Under Frequency”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY i
14. Change the default and description of “TD1-2 PU” setting in “6.4.6. TD Monitor”.
15. Change the default of “DLV Max” and “LLV Min” settings in “6.5. Loop Control”.
16. Change the default of “OUT101” setting in “6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer”.
17. Change the range of “Reclose 1” settings in “INTERVALS” menu.
- Change “Reclose Control” in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
- Change the range of “Reclose 1” settings in “7.1.1. Reclose(79)”.
18. Change “7.1.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P)”.
- Change the default of “Phase Pickup Current”.
- Change the default and description of “Curve”.
19. Change the default of “Curve” in “7.1.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51G)”.
20. Change the default of “Curve” in “7.1.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (46)”.
21. Change the range and default of “Time Delay” in “7.1.9. Phase High Current Lockout(50P-2)”.
22. Change the range and default of “Time Delay” in “7.1.10. Ground High Current Lockout(50G-2)”.
23. Change the range and default of “Time Delay” in “7.1.11. Negative Sequence High Current
Lockout(46(50)-2)”.
24. Change the settings in “COLD LOAD PICKUP” menu.
- Change “Cold Load Pickup Blocking” in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
- Change the range of “PHA(A)” setting in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”.
- Change the default of “Outage Time” setting in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”.
- Change the range of “RMT Time” and “Rst Time” setting in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup
Setup”.
25. Change the default of “Type” setting in “7.1.13.1. Phase Directional Control(67P)”.
26. Change the default of “Type” setting in “7.1.13.2. Ground Directional Control(67G)”.
27. Change the range of “Factor b” setting in “7.1.18. Time Overcurrent Curves”.
28. Change the default of “Live Line Tm” setting in “7.1.21. Live Line”.
29. Change “7.1.22. Demand Current”.
- Change the default of “Function” setting in “DEMAND” menu.
- Change the default and step of “GND Pickup” setting in “DEMAND” menu.
- Change the step of “NEQ Pickup” setting in “DEMAND” menu.
30. Change the default of “L.O Priority” setting in “7.1.23.2. Others”.
31. Change the range of “Time” setting in “7.1.24. Phase Open/Loss”.
32. Change the default of “PHA-Pickup”, “GND-Pickup” and “NEG-Pickup” settings in “7.1.25.
Alarm Current”.
33. Change “7.1.26. Loss of Phase”.
- Change the range of “Function” setting in “LOSS OF PHASE” menu.
- Change the step of “Pickup” setting in “LOSS OF PHASE” menu.
ii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
[Sep. 2012] Ver1.44

Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.7 upgrading.
1. Change the location of “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” menu.
- Change “Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree” in “5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE”.
- Change “OTHERS” in “5.2.2. GLOBAL Setting”.
- Change “5.2.3. GROUP Setting”.
- Add “6.8.5. Auto Setting Group Change”.
2. Change “6.1.6. TIME ZONE”.
3. Add “Time Req(m)” setting in “6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup”.
4. Add “6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup”.
5. Add “6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup”.
6. Change the default setting of “BI Queue size”, “AI Queue size” and “CI Queue size” setting in
“6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup”.
[Dec. 2012] Ver1.45

1. Add the Note in “TIME ZONE”.
2. Change the description for “AEvt Skip at Ft”, “Time Syn’ Type” and “Time Tag Type” in “6.2.4.
Event & Etc Setup”.
3. Change “Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)” in “7.1.18. Time
Overcurrent Curves”.
[Dec. 2012] Ver1.46

1. Add the “Side panel Port A(Option)” in “2.7. Communications”.
2. Add “4) PORT A(Option)” in “4.2. Communication Port”.
3. Add “4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option)”.
4. Change “Setting Examples” in “6.1.3. Voltage Sensing”.
5. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware V3.80 upgrading.
- Add “Fault Locator” in “2.5. Monitoring”.
- Change “Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree” in “5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE”.
- Add “2V INS-Type” setting in “6.1.3. Voltage Sensing”.
- Add “6.4.7. Fault Locator”.
- Add “6.8.6. H/W Option”.
- Change “8.3. Fault Cycle – Summary”.
6. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware V4.00 upgrading.
- Change the NOTE in “6.7.2.1. Input Debounce Timer”.
- Change the NOTE in “6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer”.
- Change “11.2. Input Ports”.
- Change “11.3. Output Ports”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

[Apr. 2013] Ver1.47

Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.9(standard type) and Ver. 4.1(external
I/O option type) upgrading.
1. Change the description of ‘RX’ and ‘TX’ lamps in “5.1.8. System Diagnostic Section”.
2. Add the setting items in “6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup”.
3. Add the setting items in “6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup”.
4. Add the setting item in “6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup”.
[Mar. 2014] Ver1.48

1. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.93(standard type) and Ver.
4.16(external I/O option type) upgrading.
- Change the range of “1V 2nd(V)” and “2V2nd(V)” in “6.1.3. Voltage Sensing”.
2. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.94(standard type) and Ver.
4.17(external I/O option type) upgrading.
- Change the range of “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent
Protection Time Delay” in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
- Change the range of “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection
Time Delay” in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
- Change the range of “Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Time Delay”
in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
- Change the range of “Time Delay” in “7.1.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SEF)”.
- Change the range of “Time Delay” in “7.1.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)”.
- Change the range of “Time Delay” in “7.1.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1)”.
- Change the range of “Time Delay” in “7.1.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip
(46(50)-1)”.
- Change the range of “Time Delay” in “7.1.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2)”.
- Change the range of “Time Delay” in “7.1.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2)”.
- Change the range of “Time Delay” in “7.1.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout
(46(50)-2)”.
iv ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Summary of Features .......................................................................................................... 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................. 6
2.1. Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................. 6
2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 8
2.3. Metering Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 9
2.4. Protection Elements........................................................................................................... 10
2.5. Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 15
2.6. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 19
2.7. Communications................................................................................................................ 23
3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 24

4. SIDE PANELCONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 25
4.1. Input and Output Terminal for SCADA ............................................................................ 25
4.2. Communication Port ......................................................................................................... 26
4.3. Current Input Terminal ...................................................................................................... 27
4.4. Voltage Input Terminal ...................................................................................................... 28
4.5. Monitor Terminal .............................................................................................................. 28
4.6. Trip & Close Terminal ....................................................................................................... 29
4.7. Outputs .............................................................................................................................. 29
4.8. Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 30
4.9. Power Input ....................................................................................................................... 30
4.10. Power Supply .................................................................................................................. 31
4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option) ................................................................................. 31
5. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 33

5.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 34
5.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 43
5.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 48
6. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 53
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY v
6.1. System ............................................................................................................................... 53

6.2. Communication ................................................................................................................. 63
6.3. Event Recorder .................................................................................................................. 93
6.4. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 94
6.5. Loop Control ................................................................................................................... 110
6.6. Passcode .......................................................................................................................... 129
6.7. PLC.................................................................................................................................. 130
6.8. Others .............................................................................................................................. 137
7. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 141

7.1. Protection(Primary, Alternate and Editebank Setup) .......................................................... 142
7.2. Select Setbank ................................................................................................................. 234
8. EVENT RECORDER ................................................................................................. 235

8.1. Operation Event............................................................................................................... 235
8.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 236
8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary.................................................................................................... 238
8.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 239
8.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 240
8.6. Aver. Load/Min ................................................................................................................ 241
8.7. Peak. Load/Hour .............................................................................................................. 242
8.8. Peak. Load/Day ............................................................................................................... 243
8.9. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 244
8.10. PQM .............................................................................................................................. 245
8.11. Alarm Current Event...................................................................................................... 247
8.12. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 248
9. MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ 249

9.1. Count ............................................................................................................................... 249
9.2. Interrupt Time .................................................................................................................. 256
9.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................... 256
9.4. DATA RESET.................................................................................................................. 257
9.5. CCU Information ............................................................................................................. 257
10. TIME .......................................................................................................................... 258

11. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 259
11.1. Recloser ......................................................................................................................... 259
11.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 261
vi ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
11.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 262
12. METERING ............................................................................................................... 263

12.1. Metering Elements ........................................................................................................ 263
13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 271

13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 271
13.2. Vent and Outer Cover .................................................................................................... 272
13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 273
13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 275
13.5. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 276
13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 277
13.7. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 278
13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses ............................................................................................. 279
13.9. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type ...................................................................... 281
13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 283
13.12. CVD Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................. 284
13.13. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 285
13.14. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 286
13.15. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling ............................................................... 288
13.16. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 288
13.17. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 289
13.18. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 289
13.19. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 290
13.20. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 291
13.21. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 291
13.22. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 292
13.23. Hardware Block Diagram............................................................................................ 293
13.24. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 294
13.25. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 295
13.26. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 296
13.27. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 297
13.28. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD) ................................................................ 297
13.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 298
13.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 300
13.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil ...................................................................................... 300
13.32. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 301
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii

14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 302

14.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 302
14.2. Malfunction Events ....................................................................................................... 304
15. PLC function.............................................................................................................. 305
viii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Description
 ETR300-R with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide
protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best
quality of electric service.
 Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option)
which fundamentally installed.
 ETR300-R provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote.
It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters.
 Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy metering
is also performed.
 Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control ETR300-R with key buttons on the user
interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled, Control
Locked, Remote enabled, Alternate-settings, Loop control Enabled, Loop control auto restore,
Hot line tag.
 Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of
settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history.
 ETR300-R contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3,
McGraw Edison, and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best
quality of electric distribution. Users can select any time of current curve simply by
programming and modifying.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 1
1.2. Summary of Features

PROTECTION
 Two Phase Time Over-current Elements
 Phase High Current Trip Elements
 Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
 Two Ground Time Over-current Elements
 Ground High Current Trip Elements
 Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
 Sensitive Earth Fault Elements
 Two Negative Time Over-current Elements
 Negative High Current Trip Elements
 Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
 Automatic Reclosing(Up To 5 Shots)
 Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control
 Phase Directional Control
 Ground Directional Control
 Directional Sensitive Earth Fault
 Negative Sequence Directional Control
 Sequence Coordination Control
 Two Under-voltage Elements
 Two Over-voltage Elements
 Under-frequency Element
 Over-frequency Element
 Hotline Tag Element
 Loop Control
2 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
EVENT RECORDER
 Restart and Diagnostic counter
 Trip and fault counter
 PQM counter
 Communication counter
 Interrupt Time
 S/W Operation recorder - last 256 events
 Fault event recorder - last 256 events
 Fault Waveform(20 cycles× 32EA) - last 32 events
 System event recorder - last 2048 events
 Setting change event recorder - last 100 events
 Load profile recorder - last 6144 days
 Diagnostic event recorder - last 512 events
 PQM detection event recorder - last 512 events
 Alarm Current detection event recorder - last 512 events
MONITORING
 Alarm Current
 Demand trip and alarm(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, I2)
 Phase Open trip and alarm
 Live Line
 Trip Counter Limit
 Synchronism Check
 Live Load Block
 Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase)
 Breaker Failure with Current Supervision
 Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)
- Interrupt
- Sag
- Swell
- Harmonics
- Current Unbalance
- Voltage Unbalance
- Under Voltage
- Over Voltage
- Under Frequency
 Battery Automatic Load Test

 Recloser Operation Failure
 Voltage Transformer Failure
 TD Monitor
 Fault Locator(This function is supported from Ver. 3.80 of ETR300-R.)
 Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure
NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.
METERING
 Each phase current and angle (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef)
 Each phase pick current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq)
 Each phase line to line voltage and angle (Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs, Vst, Vtr)
 Current and voltage symmetrical component(I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0)
 Source and Load side frequency
 Single phase and Three phase power(kW, kVar, kVA, PF)
 Energy(10kWh, 10kVarh)
 Single phase and Three phase present demand and max. demand(Ia, Ib, Ic, In, I2, kW, kVar)
 Source/Load voltage and current unbalance
 Voltage and current harmonics
 Voltage and current True R.M.S
 ETR300-R internal temperature
 Tranducers input (TD1~5)
COMMUNICATIONS
 Side panel PORT 1 RS232 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
 Side panel PORT 2 RS485 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
 Side panel PORT 3 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.0 and IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
 Side panel PORT A RJ45 Port(Option) : I/O expendable communication
 Front Panel PORT F RS232 Serial Port : ETR300-R interface software
USER INTERFACE
 Fault indicators
 Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
 Dual Functional keypads
 20×4 Character LCD Display
 42 LED indicators - Fault indications, sequence status, battery status, etc
 RS232 port
 Setting Range Help Messages
 Access Security(2 passwords, security and related to communication)
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS
 4 Opto-isolated Programmable Outputs
AUXILIARY INPUTS
 4 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
Systems
 3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum
Frequency
 50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation
Control Voltage Input

 AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%,-15%)
 Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
User available DC power Output - Option

 DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc
 DC Power Continuous : 30W
 DC Power for 10Sec : 70W
Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Standard

 Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10
 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <6V
 Burden: 0.002VA(4V)
Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

 Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10
 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V
 Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
Current Transformer Inputs (CT)

 Current Inputs I01, I02, I03, IN and Ise
 I01, I02, I03, IN Input Current Range
 1A Nominal
 2A continuous
 25A 1 second
 Burden : 0.38VA(1A)
 SEF Input Current Range
 0.05A Nominal
 0.16A Continuous
 0.6A 1 second
 Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
Control Inputs - Option

 Control Inputs 4 Channel
 Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
 250Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 125Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 48Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 24Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 12Vdc(-10%,+30%)
 Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
Control Output Contacts - Option

 Control Outputs 4 Channel
 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
 Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)
 Maximum operating power
Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts

125Vdc 0.1A
(L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.8A
24Vdc 3A
250Vac 3A
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vac 5A
2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Dielectric Strength
 CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs
 2㎸(60㎐) for 1 minute
Impulse Voltage
 IEEE C62.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic
Interference Transceivers, 6㎸(1.2×50㎲), 3㎄(8×20㎲)
Surge Withstand Capability

 IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems
(3㎸ oscillatory 1㎒ to 1.5㎒, 5㎸ fast transient 1.2×50㎲)
 IEEE C37.90.2 - 1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers, 10 V/m
(150㎒ and 450㎒, 5 W transmitter 10㎝)
Vibration Test
 IEC 255-21-1 - 1988 Electrical relays, Part 21 : Vibration, shock, bump, and seismic tests on
measuring relays and protection equipment, Section One - Vibration tests (sinusoidal), Class 1
 Control Operating Temperature

 Operating range : -25℃∼+70℃(-13℉∼+158℉)
 LCD : -20℃∼+70℃(-4℉∼+158℉) - standard
 VFD : -40℃∼+85℃(-40℉∼+185℉) - option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
2.3. Metering Accuracy

The quantity of electricity used in metering and protection is based on fundamental content which
harmonic is removed in input voltage and current parameters.
Voltage metering
 Rated voltage : AC effective value voltage 4 V
 Phase A, B, C : ±0.5%( 80 ～ 120 % of rated voltage), ±0.5˚
 Zero sequence voltage(Vo) : ±0.5 %( 80 ～ 120% of rated voltage), ±0.5˚
 V1, V2, 3V0 : ±0.6 %( 80 ～ 120% of rated voltage), ±1˚
Current metering
 Rated current : AC 0.6 Arms
 IA, IB, IC, IG : ±0.5 mA ± 0.5 % of reading(0.03~1.5 A), ±0.5˚
 IN : ±0.005 mA + ±0.5 % of reading(0.5~16.0 mA), ±1˚
 I1, I2, 3I0 : ±0.01 A ± 3 % of reading(0.003~1.5A ), ±1˚
Power metering
 Apparent Power : ±1.2 %( Rated Voltage >80 %, Rated Current >0.03)
 Active Power : ±0.7 % PF=1, ±1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
 Reactive Power : ±0.7 % PF=0, ±1% PF<0.5(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)
Frequency metering
 Source/Load Voltage Frequency : ±0.02 Hz
Harmonic metering : ±5%
The above measurement accuracy is applied only for ETR300R. The measurement accuracy of
voltage and current after through ETR300R is about ±1 %. However, the accuracy can be changed
by the type of CT and PT of a recloser.
2.4. Protection Elements

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection
Phase/Ground/Negative Pickup Level....................... 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A
*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary
according to H/W option.
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Type
 ANSI : Normally, Very, Extremely
 IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely
 EB : Normally, Very
 Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
 Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4
 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32
Time dial.................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time adder ................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response time........................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear
Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 1 ~ 600 in steps of 1s
Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

Active Sequence ........................................................ OFF, 1~5 in steps of 1
Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 20000A in steps of 1A
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01s(lower than Ver.
3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16)
0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s(Ver. 3.94~3.99,
Ver.4.17 or higher)
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection

Active Sequence ........................................................ OFF, 1~5 in steps of 1
Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 20000A in steps of 1A
3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16)
Ver.4.17 or higher)
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A
3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16)
Ver.4.17 or higher)
Cold Load Pickup Blocking

Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function……………….OFF/ ON
Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A to 20000A in steps of 1A
SEF Pickup Level ...................................................... OFF, 0.1A to 2000.0A in steps of 0.1A
Outage Time .............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ R.M.T Function….…….OFF/ ON
Phase/Ground/SEF/NEQ Restore Minimum Time... 0.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01s(lower than Ver 3.4)
0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (Ver 3.4 or higher)
Phase/Ground/SEF/NEQ Reset Time ....................... 0.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01s(lower than Ver 3.4)
0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (Ver 3.4 or higher)
Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU apply Curve Type
 ANSI : Normally, Very, Extremely
 Korean Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU Multiple………..0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU Adder Time…….0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01sec)
Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU M.R.T .................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01sec
Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES
Multiple of Cold Load….………………………….0(OFF), 1.0 to 5.0 in steps of 0.1
Cold Load Time ......................................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min
Phase Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1
Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE
Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 in steps of 0.01 xVT
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (–V0)
For voltage element polarizing the source
VTs must be connected in Wye
Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(-V2)
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Under/Over Voltage 1/2 Protection

Function..................................................................... OFF/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM
Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu
Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu
Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when over voltage
102 to 105% of Pickup when under voltage
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three
Normal Voltage Close ............................................... OFF/ON
Close Wait Time ........................................................ 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s
Close Wait Reset Time .............................................. 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s
Min. Normal Voltage ................................................. 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu
Max. Normal Voltage ................................................ 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳
Under/Over Frequency
Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02㎐ when under frequency
at CVD Pickup+0.05㎐ when under frequency
at VT Pickup - 0.02㎐ when over frequency
at CVD Pickup -0.05㎐ when over frequency
Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (definite time)
Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu
Minimum Current.................................................... OFF, 1 to 630 in steps of 1A
Normal Frequency Close........................................... OFF/ON
Close Wait Time ........................................................ 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s
Close Wait Reset Time .............................................. 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s

Min. Normal Voltage ................................................. 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01Hz
Max. Normal Voltage ................................................ 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01Hz
Level Accuracy .......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 2cycle
Reclose Control
Operations to Lockout - phase trip ............................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - ground trip .......................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - SEF trip .............................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq’ trip ............... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - phase trip......................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - ground trip ...................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - Negative Seq’ trip ........... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Reclose interval 1 ...................................................... 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.1(lower than Ver 3.4)
0.1 to 600.0 in steps of 0.1(Ver 3.4 or higher)
Reclose interval 2 ...................................................... 1 to 1800 in steps of 1
Reclose interval 3 ...................................................... 1 to 1800 in steps of 1
Reclose interval 4 ...................................................... 1 to1800 in steps of 1
Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle............................ 3 to 180 in steps of 1
Reset time from lockout ............................................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
C/P Wait Time ........................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5%
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Hot Line Tag

Curve Type
 ANSI : Moderately, Very, Extremely
 Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
Time dial.................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time adder ................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response time........................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Sequence Coordination Control

Sequence Coordination ............................................. On/ Off
Lockout Priority
Lockout Priority ........................................................ Phase/ Ground
F.I Reset Method

Reset Method ............................................................ Auto/ Manual
Time Delay for Manual Close

Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
2.5. Monitoring
Synchronism Check
Dead Voltage Maximum ............................................ 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu
Live Voltage Minimum ............................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu
Maximum Angle Difference..................................... 0(OFF), 5° to 80° in steps of 1°(lower than Ver 3.4)
1° to 100° in steps of 1°(Ver 3.4 or higher)
Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.00 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01Hz
Detect Phase .............................................................. ALL/ R(AB)/ S(CB)/ T
Delay Time ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s
Operation Counter
Number of Pickup Limit ........................................... 1 to 20000 in steps of 1
Operation Counter Set ............................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Recloser Wear
Pickup Wear............................................................... 0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
Rate System ............................................................... 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸
Rate Interrupt(㎸) ...................................................... 5.0 to 50.0㎸ in steps of 0.1
Number of Maximum Interruption ............................ 1 to 999 in steps of 1
Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase B Wear....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase C Wear....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Battery Automatic Load Test

Test Period ................................................................. 0(OFF), 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour
Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)

Interrupt Pickup Level ............................................... 0(OFF), 0.10 to 0.49pu in steps of 0.01pu
Interrupt Delay Time ................................................. 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Sag Pickup Level ....................................................... 0(OFF), 0.50 to 0.99pu in steps of 0.01pu
Sag Delay Time ......................................................... 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle
Swell Pickup Level.................................................... 0(OFF), 1.01 to 1.50pu in steps of 0.01pu
Swell Delay Time ...................................................... 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5cycle
Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level ..................... 0(OFF), 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
Voltage Total Harmonics Delay Time ....................... 0.2 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec
Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level ..................... 0(OFF), 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%
Current Total Harmonics Delay Time ....................... 0.2 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec
Voltage Unbalance Pickup Level............................... 0(OFF), 0.30 to 0.95pu in steps of 0.01pu
Voltage Unbalance Delay Time ................................. 0.1 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec
Current Unbalance Pickup Level .............................. 0(OFF), 1 to 100% in steps of 1%
Current Unbalance Delay Time ................................. 0.1 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec
Under Voltage Pickup Level ...................................... 0(OFF), 0.30 to 0.95pu in steps of 0.01pu
Under Voltage Delay Time ........................................ 0.0 to 180.0sec in steps of 0.1sec
Over Voltage Pickup Level ........................................ 0(OFF), 1.05 to 1.50pu in steps of 0.01pu
Over Voltage Delay Time .......................................... 0.0 to 180.0sec in steps of 0.1sec
Under Frequency Pickup Level ................................. 0(OFF), 46.00 to 59.98Hz in steps of 0.01Hz
Under Frequency Delay Time ................................... 0.03 to 10.00sec in steps of 0.01sec
Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A
TD Monitor
TD1 Rate ................................................................... 1 to 200 in steps of 1

TD1 Ratio .................................................................. 1 to 3000 in steps of 1
TD1 Offset ................................................................ -10000 to +10000 in steps of 1
TD1-1 Type ............................................................... Under or Over
TD1-1 PU ................................................................. 0(OFF), 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1
TD1-1 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec
TD1-2 Type ............................................................... Under or Over
TD1-2 PU ................................................................. 0(OFF), 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1
TD1-2 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec
※. NOTE : There is 4 more channels(TD2 ~ TD5) the same as above.
Live Load Blocking

Function..................................................................... OFF/RECLOSING/CLOSE/BOTH
Detect Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 0.90 pu in steps of 0.01 pu
Detect Time ............................................................... 0 to 60000ms in steps of 5ms
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳
Live Line
Detect Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 0.90 pu in steps of 0.01 pu
Detect Time ............................................................... 0.0 to 180.0s in steps of 0.1s
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳
Demand
Measured Values ....................................................... Phase A/B/C/G and NEQ Current(A)
Phase A/B/C/G and NEQ Max. Current(A)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Real Power(kW)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Max. Real Power(kW)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Reactive Power(kvar)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Max. Reactive Power(kvar)
Measurement Type .................................................... Thermal Exponential/Rolling Demand
Time Constant ........................................................... 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 min.
Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A
Phase/Ground/NEQ Time Delay ............................... 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Phase Loss Detect

On Level .................................................................... 70 ~ 85% of phase voltage (in steps of: 1%)
Off Level ................................................................... 30 ~ 75% of phase voltage (in steps of: 1%)
Delay Time ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s
Alarm Current
Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A
Phase/Ground/NEQ Time Delay ............................... 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳
Fault Locator
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km
Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
NOTE : “Fault Locator” function is supported from Ver. 3.80 of ETR300-R.
2.6. Recorder
OPERATION EVENT RECORDER
 Trigger Source
 Recloser Closed(Manual/Remote CLOSE)
 Recloser Opened(Manual/Remote OPEN)
 Storage Capacity : Total 256 Events
FAULT EVENT RECORDER
 Trigger Source
 Protection pickup Elements
 Trip command active
 Data Channels
 5 currents(A, B, C, G, SEF)
 Storage capacity : 256 events
FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE

 Trigger Source
 Protection pickup Elements
 Trip command active
 Data Channels
 5 currents(A, B, C, G, SEF), 3 voltages(A, B, C), 32 logic input states, 16ch output relays,
16ch Input
 Sample Rate : 16/32/64/128 per cycle
 Trigger Position : 1 to 5cycle(128 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes)
 Storage capacity : 32 events with max 160cycles(Cycle is dependent on sample rate)
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Protection Elements
 52A Contact
 Sequence status
 Front panel control
 AC supply
 External control
 Fail operation
 External input status
 System alarm
 Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle
 Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
 Storage Capacity : Last 2048 Events
SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Global Setting Change
 Primary Group Setting Change
 Primary Group Setting Change
LOAD PROFILE
1) Average Load/ Minute
 Trigger Source
 Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
 Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
 Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
 Trigger Time : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20 or 30 minute
2) Peak Load/ Hour
 Trigger Source
 Trigger Time : every 1 hour
 Storage Capacity : Total 6144 Events, 256days
3) Peak Load/ Day
 Trigger Source
 Trigger Time : every 1 day
 Storage Capacity : Total 6144 Events, 6144 days
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V)
 A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)
 Power Down Mode
 Gas Status
 Setting Change(Global Setting, Primary Setting, Alternate Setting)
 DSP Fail
 RTC Fail
 Memory Fail
 Flash-Rom Fail
 Circuit Voltage Fail
 Event Fail
 Count Fail
 DO Fail
 Close Fail
 Open Fail
PQM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 PQM pickup Elements
 Trigger Time : each 5 msec
ALARM CURRENT EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source
 Phase A, B, C, N Alarm current
COUNTER
 System Restart : 0 to 65534
 Diagnostic: 0 to 65534
 Operation : 0 to 65534
 Fault : 0 to 65534
 PQM : 0 to 65534
 Interrupt Time : 0 to 65534 cycle
 Communication : 0 to 65534
RECLOSER WEAR
 Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
 Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
 Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
2.7. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications
RS232, 1200-19200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8
Side panel Port 1 Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RS485/422, 1200-19200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8
Side panel Port 2 Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit
RJ-45, 10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Side panel Port 3
RJ-45, RS-422 communication method used
Side panel Port A(*Option)
I/O expendable communication port
RS232, 1200-57600bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop bit
Front Panel Port F
ETR300-R interface software
3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION
E
T
R
3
0
0
LINK
-R02
XPORT
Control & Communication Unit
PORT3
RJ45
10M/100M
K04
AC 24V
RUN
K03
POWER IN
AC 24V
DIAG/ERROR
1:DCD 2:RXD 3:TXD 4:DTR

5:GND 6:DSR 7:RTS 8:CTS
9:N/C
K02
-BAT
RX / TX
G08
PORT1
K01
+BAT
V0
AC SUPPLY
G07
CHARGER
G06
1
V23
BATTERY
G05
2TX
2RX
1TX
1RX
1
3
5559
1,3:P
REVERSE POWER
1
CN1
485+ 485- SG
G04
3
2,4:N
POWER SUPPLY
V22
PORT2
CLPU ON
2
G03
950
FUN
1
METER
79 RESET
J01 J02 J03 J04

G02
N
V21
79 CYCLE
950
G01
EVENT SET ESC 79 LOCKOUT P
F06
V13
51 FAST/DELAY
F05
1
3
5559 1:IN203
AWAKE 50 INSTANTANEOUS
1
2:IN202
CN2
ENT 3:IN201
F04
Antenna
4:+12V
PORT RF
V12
50 HIGH CURRENT
2
F03
INPUTS
A FAULT
1
4
LAMP TEST
F02
5559
1:IN204
TX
RX
1
B FAULT 4:IN205
V11
CN3
BATT' 2,5:+12V
TRIP FI
F01
3,6:GND
CHECK TEST RESET C FAULT
Antenna
3
GROUND
GPS
SEF
RCV
PROTECTION REMOTE
H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06

A Phase Unbalance
OUT206
ENABLED ENABLED
OUTPUTS
B Phase Unbalance
E10
Ise
GROUND ALTERNATE C Phase Unbalance
E09
950
OUT205
ENABLED SETTINGS
ABC / RST LIVE
E08
IN
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08
IN104
VA / VR
SEF E07
+
1
5
5559
ENABLED ENABLED VB / VS 1,5:N/C
1
E06
IN103
I03
2,6:OUT202
CN4
+
VC / VT
TRIP & CLOSE

3,7:OUT204
E05
RECLOSE
L
1
IN102
4,8:COM
E04
ENABLED AUTO RESTORE

+
4
I02
L
2
IN101
950-08
E03
1
3
L
3
5559
CONTROL HOT LINE 1,3:DC(+)
1
CN5
N.C
E02
2,4:DC(-)
LOCKED TAG
L
4
I01
2
OUT104
E01
1
3
5559
1:+12V
1
CLOSE OPEN
CN6
2:DC01
OUT103
3,4:GND
MONITORS
2
OUT102
PORT F
1
3
5559
1:DC02
1
CN7
3:DC03
OUT101
950-10
2,4:COM
4
Figure 3-1. Construction and Dimensions(Standard)
4. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION

ETR300-R Side panel construction is as follows.
2TX 10M/100M LINK

A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 1 2 3 2RX
TX RJ45
950-10 950-08 950
XPORT
RX 9
RCV Antenna Antenna 1TX 1:DCD 2:RXD 3:TXD 4:DTR
485+ 485- SG 1RX
5:GND 6:DSR 7:RTS 8:CTS
+ + + + 9:N/C
OUT101 OUT102 OUT103 OUT104 N.C IN101 IN102 IN103 IN104 GPS PORT RF PORT2 PORT1 PORT3
E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E08 E09 E10 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08
I01 I02 I03 IN Ise V11 V12 V13 V21 V22 V23 V0
MONITORS TRIP & CLOSE OUTPUTS INPUTS POWER SUPPLY POWER IN

CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
4 3 4 3 4 3 8 5 H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 6 4 4 3 J01 J02 J03 J04 4 3 K01 K02 K03 K04
5559
5559
5559
5559
5559
5559
5559
950 950
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 2 1 2 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 2 1
2,4:COM
3:DC03
1:DC02
3,4:GND
2,4:DC(-)
1,3:DC(+)
2:DC01
1:+12V
4,8:COM
3,7:OUT204
2,6:OUT202
1,5:N/C
3,6:GND
2,5:+12V
4:IN205
1:IN204
4:+12V
3:IN201
2:IN202
1:IN203
2,4:N
1,3:P
+BAT
-BAT
AC 24V
AC 24V
P
N
OUT205 OUT206
Figure 4-1. Side Panel(Standard)
Cable standard for connector refers to ‘Table 4-1. Cable rating for connector’.
Table 4-1. Cable standard for connector

Item Standard( ㎟ ) Length( ㎜ ) Model No. Remark
Current 1.25(50/0.18) 300 AkZ 960-10P
Power Supply " " AkZ 960-4P
Digital Input 0.75(12/0.18) " Molex 5557-6P,4P
Digital Output " " AkZ 950-6P
Voltage " " AkZ 960-6P,8P
4.1. Input and Output Terminal for SCADA

4 Input and 4 Output terminals for SCADA.
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08
950-10 950-08
+ + + +
OUT101 OUT102 OUT103 OUT104 N.C IN101 IN102 IN103 IN104
Figure 4-2. INPUTS and OUTPUTS
4.2. Communication Port

1) PORT1(232)
PORT1 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring
Indicator).
Table 4-2. PORT1 Pin Description

Pin Signal Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect

1
2 RXD Receive Data(IN)
3 TXD Transmit Data(OUT) 1T

1R 9
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready(OUT) 1: DCD2: RXD 3: TXD 4: DTR
5: GND6: DSR 7: RTS 8: CTS 9: N/C
5 GND Ground
PORT1
6 DSR Data Set Ready(IN)
Figure 4-3. PORT1
7 RTS Request To Send(OUT)
8 CTS Clear To Send(IN)
9 N/C No Connection
2) PORT2(485)
PORT2 has 3pins as in ‘Table 4-3. PORT2 Pin Description’.

Pin Description 1 2 3
2T
1 RS485+ 2R
950
2 RS485-
3 SG (Cable Shield) 485+ 485- SG
PORT2
Figure 4-4. PORT2
3) PORT3(ETHERNET)
PORT3 is RJ-45 that has 8pins as in ‘Table 4-4. PORT3 Pin Description’.

10Base-T Signal
Pin Wire Color
100Base-TX Signal 10M/100M LINK
1 White/Green Transmit+
2 Green Transmit-
RJ45
3 White/Orange Receive+ XPORT
4 Blue Unused
5 White/Blue Unused
6 Orange Receive- PORT3
7 White/Brown Unused Figure 4-5. PORT3

8 Brown Unused
4) PORT A(Option)
PORT A is RJ-45 and is used for communication
A TX
with External I/O Unit ETIO10. For detailed A RX
information on External I/O Unit ETIO10, refer to

RS422
PORT-A
‘4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10’.
Figure 4-6. PORT A(Option)
4.3. Current Input Terminal

Current connector starts from pin number 1(A phse), 2(B phase), 3(C phase), 4(N, ground), 5(SEF)
in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of ETR300. Connector
type is STLZ960-10.
Table 4-5. Current Input Pin Description

Pin IO1 IO2 IO3 IN Ise
A B C N
Description SEF
phase phase phase phase
Figure 4-7. Current Input Terminal
4.4. Voltage Input Terminal

Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T)
voltages. Pin arrangement is as in ‘Table 4-6. Voltage Input Pin Description’. Connector type is
STLZ960-6P and 8P.
Table 4-6. Voltage Input Pin Description

Pin V11 V12 V13 V21 V22 V23 V0
Default LCD
A B C R S T V0
Display
Figure 4-8. Voltage Input Terminal
4.5. Monitor Terminal

It is input terminal to monitor ETR300 status and its pin arrangement is as in ‘Table 4-7. Monitors
Pin Description’.
Table 4-7. Monitors Pin Description

Connector Pin Description
CN6 DC01 Gas Pressure, 10V
DC02 Spare, 20mA
CN7
DC03 Spare, 20mA
Figure 4-9. MoitersTerminal
4.6. Trip & Close Terminal

Output terminal to control ETR300 and its arrange is as in ‘Table 4-8. TRIP & CLOSE Pin
Description’.
Table 4-8. TRIP & CLOSE Pin Description

Connector Pin Description
OUT202 CLOSE
CN4
OUT204 TRIP
CN5 DC POWER
Figure 4-10. TRIP & CLOSE Terminal
4.7. Outputs
Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 2 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin
arrangement is as follow.
Figure 4-11. Outputs
4.8. Inputs
5 inputs of status provision.
Pin arrangement is as in ‘Table 4-9. Digital Input Pin Description’.
Table 4-9. Digital Input Pin Description

Connector Pin Description Connector Pin
01 Open 04
status
02 Close 04
CN2 CN2
status
03 Manual 04
Unlock
01 Door open 02, Figure 4-12. Digital Input Terminal
status 05
CN3 CN3
04 Spare 02,
05
4.9. Power Input

Power Input Terminal for ETR300’s Power Supply . Pin Configuration is followed ‘Table 4-10.
Power Input Pin Description’.
Table 4-10. Power Input Pin Description

Pin Description
K01 Battery + Terminal
K02 Battery –Terminal
K03 AC 24V Input terminal
K04 AC 24V Input terminal
Figure 4-13. Power Input Terminal
4.10. Power Supply

Input and Output Terminal for Modem Power.
CN1 Connector
 P : DC 24V + (rectified voltage)
 N : GND
J Connector
 P : DC 24V +
 N : GND
Figure 4-14. Power Input Terminal
4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option)

By using the EXT Port, the number of input and output channels of ETR300-R is expanded.
External I/O Unit ETIO10 is configured the following way.
1) COM Port
 RJ-45
 ETR300-R Communication between
side panel Port A and RS422
2) DC Power Input
 DC Power Voltage : 12, 24, 110Vdc
 DC Power Continuous : 4W Figure 4-15. External I/O Unit ETO10
3) Inputs Channels
 Input 12 Channels
 Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
 250Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 125Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 48Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 24Vdc(-15%,+20%)
 12Vdc(-10%,+30%)
 Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
4) Output Channels
 Output 8 Channels
 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
 Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)
 Maximum operating power
Table 4-11. Output Channel Contacts

125Vdc 0.1A
(L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.8A
24Vdc 3A
250Vac 3A
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vac 5A
I/O UNIT
PORT1 DO DI IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9IN10 IN11IN12
POW
RUN
TX
RX
8 4 12 8 4
RS422 A01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 B01 02 03 04 05 06
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 ALARM

P N SG FG LAMP
ETIO10
TEST
E01 02 03 04 C01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 D01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO,, LTD.
Figure 4-16. ETO10’s Side Panel
5. USER INTERFACE PANEL

This section describes the User Interface Panel(front-panel)
User Interface Panel uses LCD(20  4) and keypad to provide any function selection for monitoring
and LEDs indicates selected function status and recloser operation status.
The User interface Panel control is used for;

 Directly control the recloser
 Verify control status
 View system status
 View metering value
 View information stored in the ETR300-R unit
 View and change the ETR300-R settings
Control & Communication Unit ETR300 -R02

RUN
DIAG/ERROR
RX / TX
AC SUPPLY
CHARGER
BATTERY
REVERSE POWER
CLPU ON
FUN
METER
79 RESET
79 CYCLE
EVENT SET ESC 79 LOCKOUT
51 FAST/DELAY
ENT
50 HIGH CURRENT
A FAULT
LAMP TEST
B FAULT
BATT' TRIP FI
CHECK TEST RESET C FAULT
GROUND
SEF
PROTECTION REMOTE A Phase Unbalance

ENABLED ENABLED
B Phase Unbalance
GROUND ALTERNATE C Phase Unbalance
ENABLED SETTINGS
ABC / RST LIVE
VA / VR
SEF
ENABLED ENABLED VB / VS
VC / VT
RECLOSE
L1
L2
CONTROL HOT LINE L3

LOCKED TAG
L4
CLOSE OPEN
PORT F
Figure 5-1. User Interface Panel
5.1. Construction
Panel consists of 8 sections as below;
 Operation section
 Local control section
 Menu control section
 Other control section
 Fault indication section
 Voltage elements section
 Reclosing Sequence status section
 System diagnostic section
 Battery status section
 User LED section
 Other status section
5.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN
Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.
CLOSE
Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser.
Units operating with firmware version 2.18 or later have a feature of Close Time Delay. The Close
Time Delay allows a delay of 0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before
closing the recloser.
POSITION LED
Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.
Figure 5-2. Operation Section
5.1.2. Local Control Section

All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the
control function is enable and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is
DISABLE. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable
PROTECTION ENABLED
All Protection elements are enabled
GROUND ENABLED
Ground Protection elements are disabled
SEF ENABLED
SEF Protection elements are disabled
RECLOSE ENABLED
Reclose function is enabled
CONTROL LOCKED
Front panel function is unlocked
REMOTE ENABLED
Remote control is disabled
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Figure 5-3. Local Control Section
Alternate setting is disable
Primary Setting is enable
LOOP CONTROL ENABLED
Loop control function is enabled
LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE
Auto restoration function of is enabled
HOT LINE TAG
Hot Line Tag function is disabled
Protection Enabled
When illuminated, all protection elements are enabled. The enabled protection condition can be
disabled by pressing the Protection Enabled push button on the front panel.
NOTE : If “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, all protection elements are operating,

however, Ground Overcurrent Protection Element and Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Element
are individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button.
Ground Enabled
LED is ON and OFF by pressing a button. “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is ON and
GROUND ENABLED LED is ON, Ground Overcurrent Protection element operates. However,
Even if “GROUND ENABLED” is ON and “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, Ground
protection does not operate. If “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “PROTECTION ENABLED” is
ON, ground protection does not operate.
SEF Enabled
LED is ON and OFF by pressing a button. “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is ON and SEF
ENABLED LED is ON, sensitive earth fault protection element operates. However, Even if “SEF
ENABLED” is ON and “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, sensitive earth fault protection
does not operate. If “SEF ENABLED” is OFF, “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, sensitive earth
fault protection does not operate.
Reclose Enabled
When Reclose Enable LED is on, the reclose(79) element is enabled. The enabled reclose element
can be disabled by pressing the Recloser Enabled push-button on the front panel.
Control Locked
When Control Locked LED is on, all functions in operation section and all functions in Local
control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the Control Locked push-button on
the front panel
NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Lamp Test, Battery Load
Test and menu control section can be normally operated.
Remote Enabled
When Remote Enabled LED is on, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system) are enabled.
This can be disabled by pressing the Remote Enabled push-button on the front panel. SCADA
control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0
Alternate Enabled
When Alternate Enabled LED is on, the Alternate setting is activated.
When Alternate Enabled LED is off, the primary setting is activated.
Activated group on display, is applied to ‘GROUP Setting’.
Loop Control Enabled

When Loop Control Enabled LED is on, loop control function is enabled. SEC, MID can be
selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be selected on OPEN status.
Loop Control Auto Restore

When Loop Control Auto Restore LED is on, auto restoration function is enabled. Auto restoration
function is, after loop control operation, Auto Ret’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the
preset values.
Hot Line Tag

When Hot Line Tag LED is on, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.
5.1.3. Menu Control Section

ETR300-R has 20  4 LCD(Liquid Cristal Display) display.
LCD DISPLAY
4x20 Characters display
CONTROL KEYS
[▲] [▼] [◀] [▶]
Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting
value
[▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode
[◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode
[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode
[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level
[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input
Figure 5-4. Menu Control Section
[FUN] Key
Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is
also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display.
[ESC] Key
The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.
[ENT] Key
ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to
accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.
[◀] [▶] Key

Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when
you change display message.
[▲] [▼] Key

Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value
when you are in the data input mode.
5.1.4. Other Control Section

BATT’ CHECK
Push-button for battery load test. Battery
alarm setting, refer to TD menu.
TRIP TEST
Figure 5-5. Menu Control Section
Push-button for trip test. By pressing this
butoon, fault simulation is activated like
1500A of fault current flow in phase A, B, C.
Protection function is operated according to
the user setting .
FI RESET
Reset fault indication/Lamp test
5.1.5. Fault Indication Section

On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than overcurrent
set level.
 Phase Time Over-current Elements – Fast/Delay

 Phase High Current Trip Elements
 Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements
 Ground Time Over-Current Elements – Fast/Delay
 Ground High Current Trip Elements
 Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements
 Sensitive Earth Time Over-Current Elements
 Negative Sequence Time Over-Current Elements -
Fast/Delay
 Negative Sequence High Current Trip Elements
Figure 5-6. Fault Indication Section
 Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements
 Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth and Negative Directional
Control
TRIP TYPE
 51 FAST/DELAY : Shows delay trip
 50 INSTANTANEOUS : Shows high current trip
 50 HIGH CURRENT : Shows high current lockout
FAULT INDICATION
 A, B, C FAULT : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on one of the phase lines
 GROUND : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on the neutral line
 SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line
5.1.6. Voltage Elements Section

Indicates that voltage pickup element is operated. A Phase Unbalance
 Two Under voltage Elements B Phase Unbalance
 Two Over voltage Elements

C Phase Unbalance
 Synchronism Element
ABC / RST LIVE
 Under frequency Element
VA / VR
 Hot Line Elements
VB / VS
VC / VT
A Phase Unbalance : A phase angle difference detected
B Phase Unbalance: B phase angle difference detected Figure 5-7. Voltage Elements
C Phase Unbalance: C phase angle difference detected Section
ABC/RST LIVE : Source and load side live line status
VA/VR, VB/VS, VC/VT : Each phase Phase Open/Loss Status
5.1.7. Reclosing Sequence Status Section

Indicates the current status of programmed sequence procedure.
79 RESET : Sequence shows resetting

79 CYCLE : Sequence shows running
79 LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout
Figure 5-8. Sequence Status Section
5.1.8. System Diagnostic Section
Indicates Diagnostic status of the ETR300-R. RUN LED(green) indicates the ETR300-R has
successfully passed its internal diagnostic test. DIAG/ERROR LED(Red) indicates the ETR300-R
has failed its internal diagnostic test. RX/TX LED(Red) shows Communication status of ETR300-R.
RUN
Status of ETR300-R systems shows normal
DIAG/ERROR
Status of ETR300-R systems shows warning
RX Figure 5-9. System Diagnostic Section
Shows the data receiving status for remote
communication.
TX
Shows the data transferring status for remote communication.
NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal
5.1.9. Battery Status Section
Indicates the system power status of the ETR300-R. AC SUPPLY indicates the ETR300-R has
external power source. CHARGER LED shows ETR300-R charging status, BATTERY LED shows
ETR300-R battery status.
AC SUPPLY
Status of supplying the external AC power.
CHARGER
If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status. Charging
voltage is always monitored, refer to TD menu for detail. Figure 5-10. Battery Status Section
BATTERY
If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status.
To check the battery, do battery load test and check LED
status.
5.1.10. User LED Section
Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed.

PLC logic is set in ‘ETR300-R interface software’.
Factory default setting is as follows.
Figure 5-11. User LED Section
Table 5-1. Default User LED Function

LED No Name Descrpition
L1 MLOCK L1 becomes ON when handle is locked.
L2 GASLOW + L2 becomes ON when gas pressure is low or high.
GASHIGH
L3 DSPLINK L3 becomes ON when dsp bord linked.
L4 CPULINK L4 becomes ON when communication bord linked.
5.1.11. Other Status Section
REVER POWER
When reverse current flows, REVERSE POWER LED
becomes On. Reverse power is determined by 3-phase
power factor.
Figure 5-12. Other Status Section
CLPU ON
In the Cold Load Duration, CLPU ON LED becomes On.
5.2. LCD Display

20  4 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and
to check operation status clearly.
[MAIN MENU] >1.GLOBAL SETTING
[BI-CCU(R) FOR DAS]

>2.GROUP SETTING
SEQUENCE : 0
REC STATUS : CLOSE
SEQ[L-OUT] A-C[ - ] >3.EVENT
>4.MAINTENANCE
A:00000 00.0/00.0
B:00000 00.0/00.0
C:00000 00.0/00.0 >5.TIME
N:00000 SEF: 0.00
>6.STATUS
GPS [LINK Success] >7.METERING

2010/01/07 01:58:21
[N 89D 60M 0.00S ]
[E 0D 0M 0.00S ]
LOOP CONTROL [NON]

VS-[--] VSDLT-[ - ]
VL-[--] VLDLT-[ - ]
AUTO RESTORE T-[ - ]
Figure 5-13. Initial Logo and Main Menu
5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE

 Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu.
 Initial screen and all menu are round robin algorithm.
 Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu.
 Main menu has 7 sub-menus.
>1.POWER LINE
2.CURRENT SENSING
3.VOLTAGE SENSING
[MAIN MENU] >1.GLOBAL SETTING >1.SYSTEM 4.CB OPENING TIME
>1.DNP3 S1
5.GAS SENSOR TYPE
2.DNP3 S2
6.TIME ZONE
3.IEC870-5-101
4.IEC870-5-104 >1.PORT1(232)
>2.COMMUNICATION >1.PROTOCOL SETUP 5.MODBUS 2.PORT3(485)
3.PORT4(ETHERNET)
>2.PORT SETUP 4.PORTF(232)
>1.CALLING STRING
>3.DIALUP MODEM >1.DIAL1
2.CALLING NUMBER
>3.EVENT RECORDER 3.INITIAL STRING
>4.EVENT&ETC SETUP 4.CONNECTION
5.FTP FILE TRANSFER
*.SAVE SETTING
>1.PQM FUNCTION
>4.MONITORING >1.SYNCHROCHECK 2.INTERRUPT
2.OPERATION COUNT 3.SAG
3.CONTACT WEAR 4.SWELL
4.BATTERY TEST 5.HARMONICS
6.CURR UNBALANCE
>5.PQM 7.VOLT UNBALANCE
8.UNDER VOLTAGE
>5.LOOP CONTROL
>6.TD MONITOR 9.OVER VOLTAGE
7.FAULT LOCATOR 10.UNDER FREQUENCY
11.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT
>1.PASSCODE1
>6.PASSCODE
2.PASSCODE2
>1.LOGIC TIMER
2.PULSE TIMER
>7.PLC >1.COMMON
3.PULSE COUNTER
>1.INPUT DEBOUNCE
>2.DI/DO
2.OUTPUT PULSE TIME
>8.OTHERS >1.TIME DISP’TYPE

2.PANEL SLEEP TIME >1.OPERATION
3.Vo SELECT >1.PHASE/NEG SEQ’
>*.SAVE SETTING
4.FACTORY DEBUG 2.GROUND
>2.INTERVALS
5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE 3.SEF
6.H/W OPTION 4.OTHERS
>3.PICKUP CURRENT
4.PHASE FAST
>2.GROUP SETTING >1.PRIMARY 5.PHASE DELAY
6.GROUND FAST
7.GROUND DELAY
8.SEF ELEMENT
9.NEG SEQ FUNC
10.NEG SEQ FAST
>2.ALTERNATE 11.NEG SEQ DELAY
12.H/C TRIP-PHA
13.H/C TRIP-GND
14.H/C TRIP-NEG
15.H/C LOCKUOT-PHA
16.H/C LOCKUOT-GND
>3.EDITBANK 17.H/C LOCKUOT-NEG
18.COLD LOAD PICKUP >1.PHASE
2.GROUND
>19.DIRECTION 3.SEF
4.NEG SEQ
>4.SELECT SETBANK >1.UNDER/OVER VOLT 1

>20.VOLTAGE
>1.OPERATION 2.UNDER/OVER VOLT 2
>3.EVENT 2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE >21.FREQUENCY >1.UNDER/OVER FREQ’
4.SYSTEM >1.USER CURVE 1
5.SET CHANGE 2.USER CURVE 2
>22.USER CURVE
6.AVER.LOAD/MIN 3.USER CURVE 3
7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR 4.USER CURVE 4
>23.LIVE LOAD BLOCK
8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY >1.OPERATION >1.PHASE
9.DIGNOSTIC 2.FAULT 2.GROUND
10.PQM 3.FAULT WAVE >24.HOTLINE TAG
3.SEF
11.ALARM CURRENT 4.SYSTEM 4.NEG SEQ
5.SET CHANGE >25.LIVE LINE
6.LOAD PROFILE 26.DEMAND
7.DIGNOSTIC 27.OTHER ELEMENT
>12.CLEAR SAVED DATA
8.PQM 28.ON/OFF LEVEL
9.PQM WAVE 29.ALARM CURRENT
10.ALARM CURRENT 30.LOSS OF PHASE
>1.CCU
11.ABOVE ALL *.SAVE SETTING
2.OPERATION
3.FAULT
>4.MAINTENANCE >1.COUNT
4.PQM
5.COMMUNICATION
>2.INTERRUT TIME
>5.TIME
3.CONTACT WEAR >1.CCU COUNT
>1.RECLOSER 2.OPERATION COUNT
>1.CURRENT
2.INPUT PORTS >4.DATA RESET 3.FAULT COUNT
>6.STATUS 2.VOLTAGE
3.OUTPUT PORTS 4.PQM COUNT
3.FREQUENCY
5.COM’COUNT
4.POWER
>5.CCU INFO 6.COUNT ALL
>7.METERING 5.ENERGY
7.INTERRUT TIME
6.DEMAND
8.CONTACT WEAR
7.UNBALANCE
9.ENERGY
8.HARMONICS
10.MAX DEMAND
9.TRUE R.M.S
11.PEAK CURRENT
10.TD
12.COMM BUFF
11.CCU SEF
13.ABOVE ALL
*. Note ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETR300-R.
Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree
5.2.2. GLOBAL Setting

SYSTEM
Set items related to system elements.
Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING, VOLTAGE SENSING, CB OPENING TIME,
GAS SENSOR TYPE and TIME ZONE.
TIME ZONE menu is optional and related Time Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG).
COMMUNICATION
Set items related to communication elements.
Consists of PROTOCOL SETUP, PROT SETUP, DIALUP MODEM, EVENT&ETC and FTP
FILE TRANSFER.
EVENT RECORDER
Set items related to fault wave recorder elements.
MONITORING
Set items related to measurement and maintenance.
Consists of SYNCHROCHECK, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY TEST,
PQM, PD and TD MONITOR.
LOOP CONTROL
Set items related to loop control elements.
PASSCODE
Set items related to passcode sequrity.
Consists of PASSCODE1 and PASSCODE2.
PASSCODE2 is related communication settings and PASSCODE1 is related other settings.
PLC
PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements and related elements are set. This menu consists of
COMMON and DI/DO sub-menu.
OTHERS
Set items related to other elements.
Consists of TIME DISP’ TYPE, PANEL SLEEP TIME, Vo SELECT, FACTORY DEBUG and
AUTO SET-GROUP CHANGE.
FACTORY DEBUG menu is used only maker.
SAVE SETTING
Save all changed values.
5.2.3. GROUP Setting

This menu is divided into Primary group and Alternate group for user’s convenient. A group is
selected by ON/OFF ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS’ LED on ETR300-R panel.
(1) Select Set-group

Consists of Primary group and Alternate group.
 PRIMARY GROUP : If ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS’ LED is OFF, primary group settings
are applied to protection elements.
 ALTERNATE GROUP : If ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS’ LED is ON, alternate group settings
are applied to protection elements.
[GROUP SETTING]
>1.PRIMARY
2.ALTERNATE
Ficture 5-15. PRIMARY GROUP and ALTERNATE GROUP
[ALTERNATE SETTINGS] button is used to select a group to apply present protection elements.
(2) Select Setbank

ETR300-R has 6 SetBanks(BANK1 ~ BANK6). In this menu, Primary, Alternate and Edit bank
select SetBank.
 Primary : Select SetBANK to be applied to System.
 Alternate : Press [Alternate Enable] button and select a SetBANK to apply in the system.
 Edit : Select a SetBANK to edit.
(3) Primary Setting

Set items related to protection elements.
(4) Alternate Setting

Protection elements and its related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same
as“PRIMARY SETTING” . Protection elements and related elements are set in this menu. Set
elements are the same as “PRIMARY SETTING”.
(5) Editbank Setting

Protection elements and its related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same
as“PRIMARY SETTING” . Protection elements and related elements are set in this menu. Set
elements are the same as “PRIMARY SETTING”.
5.2.4. Event
ERT300-R Event information is shown in this menu.
Consists of OPERATION, FAULT, FAULT CYCLE, SYSTEM, SET CHANGE,
AVER.LOAD/MIN, PEAK.LOAD/HOUR, PEAK.LOAD/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC, PQM, ALARM
CURRENT and CLEAR SAVED DATA.
5.2.5. Maintenance
Shows about Event Maintenance items.
 COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic.
 INTERRUT TIME : Interruption occurring cumulated time is displayed.
 CONTACT WEAR : Shows any damage Interrupter.
 DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset.
 CCU INFO : Present ETR300-R information is displayed.
For more detail information, please refer to “9. Maintenance” .
5.2.6. Time
Present time can be set and checked.
5.2.7. Status
Present status of recloser and Input/Output are displayed.
5.2.8. Metering
Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see 12. METERING)
5.3. Using the LCD Menu

5.3.1. INITING LOGO
Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in ETR300-R.
① To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button.

② Press [FUN] or [ESC] button in initial screen to move to Main menu.
INITING LOGO
[BI-CCU(R) FOR DAS] Initial Screen 1

SEQUENCE : 4
REC STATUS : OPEN ① SEQUNCE: Number of reclosing operation(0~4) is displayed.
SEQ[L-OUT] A-CL[ - ]
② REC STATUS: Circuit Breaker Open/Close Status is displayed.
[BI-CCU(R) FOR DAS]  CLOSE: Displays Circuit Breaker is closed.
SEQUENCE : ①
REC STATUS : ②  OPEN: Displays Circuit Breaker is opened.
SEQ[ ③ ] A-CL[ ④ ]
 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect
or cable connection is not completed.
③ It is showing reclosing sequence process.
 If the total operation number is set for 4 times and continuous
fault occurred.
 When SEQUENCE number 0 is displayed, SEQ[HOME] is
displayed. It means reclosing ready state.
 When SEQUENCE number 1~3 is displayed, SEQ[RUN] is
displayed. It means reclosing running state.
 When SEQUENCE number 3 is displayed and SEQ[L-OUT] is
displayed. It means recloser lockout state.
④ It is showing auto closing status.
 It is related voltage and frequency protection function,
 When A-CL[RUN] is displayed, voltage or frequency is normal
state and auto closing timer is runnig state.
NOTE :
If “WARING SYSTEM ERROR” in the initial screen, control
panel is in abnormal condition. Immediately stop operation and
contact Manufacturer.
INITING LOGO
A: 0 0.0/ 0.0 Initial Screen 2

B: 0 0.0/ 0.0
C: 0 0.0/ 0.0 ① Each phase current value is displayed(A,B,C,N)[A].
N: 0 SEF: 0.00
② Each phase voltage is displayed(A,B,C/R,S,T) [kV].
A: ① ② / ②
③ SEF current value is displayed [A].
B: ① ② / ②
C: ① ② / ②
N: ① SEF: ③
GPS [LINK Success] Initial Screen 3

2010/01/07 14:48:50
[N 89D 60M 0.00S ] If Time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is installed, received
[E 0D 0M 0.00S ]
time synchronization data is displayed. If Time synchronization module
GPS [ ① ] option is not exist, “GPS MODULE NOT INSTALLED” is displayed.
②
[ ③ ]
Check Time Synchronization module antenna install before checking
[ ④ ] time synchronization data.
① GPS receiving status display.
Normal connection, [LINK Success] is displayed.
Connection fail, [SAT’ LINK Fail] is displayed.
② Received time information, UTC(Universal Time Coordinated)
from GPS. Local time is set by (Main Menu / Global Setting /
System / Time Zone), and check Time in Main Menu.
③ Longitude(° , " , ') is displayed.
④ Latitude( ° , " , ' ) is displayed.
LOOP CONTROL [TIE] Initial Screen 4

VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ]
VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] If Loop control function is installed, this screen is displayed.
AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
LOOP CONTROL: [SEC], [MID], [TIE]
Display a selected type.
VS: [DV], [LV]
Display source side voltage of recloser either dead line or live line.
VL: [DV], [LV]
Display load side voltage of recloser either dead line or live line.
VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line of
source side.
VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line of load side.
AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays restoring status after loop control operation.
5.3.2. MAIN MENU

In the initial menu, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC]
button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below.
MAIN MENU
[MAIN MENU] Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menu.

>1.GLOBAL SETTING
2.GROUP SETTING You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key.
3.EVENT
4.MAINTENANCE Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
5.TIME
6.STATUS
7.METERING
As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.
5.3.3. View Example

To see External input port status. Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS”.
The following screen is displayed.
MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ INPUT PORTS
LO/DEASSERT : Shows External Input is de-asserted,

[INPUT PORT]
IN 101 :LO/DEASSERT HI/ASSERT : Shows External Input is asserted.
IN 102 :LO/DEASSERT
IN 103 :LO/DEASSERT
IN 104 :LO/DEASSERT
IN 105 :LO/DEASSERT Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen, use [▲] [▼] key to see
IN 106 :LO/DEASSERT
IN 107 :LO/DEASSERT next lines.
IN 108 :LO/DEASSERT
IN 201 : HI/ASSERT
IN 202 : HI/ASSERT
IN 203 : HI/ASSERT
IN 204 : HI/ASSERT
IN 205 : HI/ASSERT
IN 206 : HI/ASSERT
IN 207 : HI/ASSERT
IN 208 : HI/ASSERT
5.3.4. Setting Example

Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting.
1) Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY/ PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE”.

A following screen is displayed.
MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY/ PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE
[PICKUP CURRENT] Range (0)OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
>Phase: 500
Ground: 250 Default 500A Step 1A
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Phase pickup current. This value is primary current.
Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio.
Primary current = Secondary current × CT ratio.
2) As above screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into value
column.
3) Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value.
Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value.
NOTE : You must save all changed values at ”Setting Save” menu.
5.3.5. Setting Save

To save all changed values, steps are as follows;
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY / SAVE SETTING” and follow each
step as below(“Global Setting” menu and “Group Setting/ Alternate or EditBank” menu has
“*.Setting Save” menu).
MAIN MENU / PRIMARY SETTING / SAVE SETTING
①
① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button.
SETTING CHANGED
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct, ③

② screen appears; otherwise ② screen appears again.
ENTER PASSCODE 1
③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③ screen is displayed for
0000
short period.
③
If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE SETTING”, then,
[SAVE SETTING]
screen ④ is displayed.
* SUCCESS *
④
NOTE :
* NOTHING CHANGED *
Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved.
If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is
remained.
6. GLOBAL SETTING
Place the curser in “GLOBAL SETTING”, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL SETTING.
This menu has sub-menu as below.
[GLOBAL SETTING]
>1.SYSTEM
2.COMMUNICATION
3.EVENT RECODER
4.MONITERING
5.LOOP CONTROL
6.PASSCODE
7.PLC
8.OTHERS
*.SAVE SETTING
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value
saved message’.
6.1. System
Place the curser on “SYSTEM” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to
this menu. In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below.
[SYSTEM]
>1.POWER LINE
2.CURRENT SENSING
3.VOLTAGE SENSING
4.CB OPENING TIME
5.GAS SENSOR TYPE
6.TIME ZONE
CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is
requested.
6.1.1. Power Line

Place a cursor on “POWER LINE” in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this
menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Frequency
[POWER LINE] Range 50, 60 ㎐
>Frequency: 60
Ref.Voltage: A Default 60* Step ~
[50/60Hz]
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a
default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.
It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec.
NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Reference Voltage

[POWER LINE] Range A, B, C, NONE
>Ref.Voltage: A
Phase Rotation: ABC Default A Step ~
[A/B/C/NONE]
Reference voltage set. Beside of Hard wire connection, phase
connection shall be adjusted by software as well.
NOTE : Depending on settings of 'Reference voltage' and

'Phase Rotation' bushing connection is changed. Refer to ‘Table
6-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and
phase rotation’.
Table 6-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation.
Setting Source Side: 1V
Ref.Voltage A Ref.Voltage B Ref.Voltage C
Rotation : Rotation : Rotation : Rotation : Rotation : Rotation :
Display ABC ACB ABC ACB ABC ACB
A(R)/IA V11(V21) V11(V21) V12(V22) V12(V22) V13(V23) V13(V23)

/I01 /I01 /I02 /I02 /I03 /I03
B(S)/IB V12(V22) V13(V23) V13(V23) V11(V21) V13(V21) V13(V22)

/I02 /I03 /I03 /I01 /I01 /I02
C(T)/IC V13(V23) V12(V22) V11(V21) V13(V23) V12(V22) V11(V21)

/I03 /I02 /I01 /I03 /I02 /I01
Setting Source Side: 2V

Ref.Voltage A Ref.Voltage B Ref.Voltage C
Rotation : Rotation : Rotation : Rotation : Rotation : Rotation :
Display ABC ACB ABC ACB ABC ACB
A(R)/IA V21(V11) V21(V11) V22(V12) V22(V12) V23(V13) V23(V13)

/I01 /I01 /I02 /I02 /I03 /I03
B(S)/IB V22(V12) V23(V13) V23(V13) V21(V11) V21(V11) V22(V12)

/I02 /I03 /I03 /I01 /I01 /I02
C(T)/IC V23(V13) V22(V12) V21(V11) V23(V13) V22(V12) V21(V11)

/I03 /I02 /I01 /I03 /I02 /I01
NOTE
1. V11 and I01 are the input terminal of voltage and current on control panel.
2. () indicates Load side.
3. When Source Side set 2V, current value is calculated in software with changed CT
polarity.
4. CT polarity can be adjustable.
When Reference Voltage set None, depending on Phase Rotation, normal voltage and negative
voltage are calculated in opposite. It does not influence any others.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation

[POWER LINE] Range ABC, ACB
Ref.Voltage: A
>Phase Rotation: ABC Default ABC Step ~
[ABC/ACB]
Select the phase rotation of the power system.
6.1.2. Current Sensing

Place a cursor in “CURRENT SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified in
multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT
inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents
(Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current.
In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary
conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the
ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive
earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered.
For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see 13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram).
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 2000
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
[1~2000:1]
Set phase CT ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 5000
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
[1~5000:1]
Set ground CT ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING] Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0
>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR Default 1000.0 Step 0.1
0(OFF),0~1000.0:0.1
Set sensitive earth CT ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] Range Forward, Reverse
CSEF CT Ratio: 133.3
>PHA CT Pol’: FOR Default Forward Step ~
[FOR/REV]
Set phase CT pole direction.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING] Range Forward, Reverse
CPHA CT Pol’: FOR
>SEF CT Pol’: FOR Default Forward Step ~
[FOR/REV]
Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.
6.1.3. Voltage Sensing

Place a curser in “VOLTAGE SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.
ETR300-R has 2(Two) voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load
side line voltages. To measure received voltages, set Voltage connectors’ Connect Type, 2nd
Nominal Voltage and VT Ratio.
With Line VTs installed, the ETR300-R can be used to perform voltage measurements, power
calculations, and directional control of over-current elements. And with Line VTs installed, the
ETR300-R can be used to perform synchronism elements.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA
>1V CON-Type: WYE
>1V 2nd(V): 4.00 Default WYE Step ~
[NONE/WYE/DELTA]
Select the voltage type of system that input to 1V(1st Voltage
Connector) .
 NONE : VT non installed. Select NON if Voltage Sensing item is
not used.
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V 2nd(V)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.93 and Ver. 4.00~4.15
>1V 2nd(V): 4.00
>1V Ratio: 3300.0 of ETR300-R : 2.00~350.00V
[2.00~350.00:0.01V]
− Applicable for Ver. 3.93~3.99, Ver. 4.16 or higher of
ETR300-R : 1.00~350.00V
Default 4.00 Step 0.01V
Enter the second rated voltage(V) of 1V(1st Voltage connector).
This setting is the second rated voltage that entered in the relay about
line rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 10.0 ~ 6500.0
>1V 2nd(V): 4.0
>1V Ratio: 3300.0 Default 3300.0 Step 0.1
[10.0~6500.0:0.1]
Enter the VT rated rate of 1V(1st Voltage connector).
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA
>2V CON-Type: WYE
2V 2nd(V): 4.0 Default WYE Step ~
[NONE/WYE/DELTY]
Select the voltage type of system that input to 2V(2nd Voltage
Connector) .
 NONE : VT non installed. Select NON if Voltage Sensing item is
not used.
 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Y-Type, Select WYE.
 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V 2nd(V)

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.93 and Ver. 4.00~4.15
>2V 2nd(V): 4.00
>2V Ratio: 3300.0 of ETR300-R : 2.00~350.00V
[2.00~350.00:0.01V]
ETR300-R : 1.00~350.00V
Default 4.00 Step 0.01V
Enter the second rated voltage(V) of 2V(2nd Voltage Connector).
This setting is the second rated voltage that entered in the relay about
line rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 10.0 ~ 6500.0
>2V 2nd(V): 4.0
>2V Ratio: 3300.0 Default 3300.0 Step 0.1
[10.0~6500.0:0.1]
Enter the VT Rated Rate of 2V(2nd Voltage Connector).
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V INS-Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T
>2V Ratio: 3300.0
>2V INS-Type: 3P Default 3P Step ~
[3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-S]
Insert the type of sensing voltage for the recloser body unit.
3P : Three phases voltage sensing installed
1P-R : One phase voltage sensing installed to the R phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-S : One phase voltage sensing installed to the S phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-T : One phase voltage sensing installed to the T phase of the
recloser body unit.
NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to

only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.
 Synchronism Check
 Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection – PQM
 Voltage Unbalance Detection – PQM
 Under and Over Voltage Detection – PQM
 Loop Control
 Directional Control
 Under and Over Voltage Protection
 Live Line Detection
 Phase Open/Loss Detection
 Loss of Phase
 Live Load Blocking
NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver. 3.8 of ETR300-R.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side

[VOLTAGE SENSING] Range 1V, 2V
>2V Ratio: 3300.0
>Source Side: 1V Default 1V Step ~
[1V/2V]
Select the Source side of System.
According to the selected value the indication of “MAIN MENU/
METERING/ VOLTAGE” change. In the VOLTAGE screen, indicate
ABC in the Source Side, and RST in the Load Side.
Setting Examples
Depending on voltage level, PT Ratio and secondary rate are set before delivery.
For instance, 38kV level case, based on 33000V line, Ratio is set for 3300.0 : 1, and secondary is
set for 5.77V. Ratio shall not be changed. When reference voltage changes, secondary shall also be
changed.
In case that system voltage is 34000V, PT Ratio remains the same 3300.0, but secondary voltage
shall be changed to 5.95V.
Below table shows, PT ratio and Secondary voltage setting depending on System voltage level.
Table 6-2. PT Ratio and 2nd Voltage Relation

System Voltage Level Reference line Voltage PT Ratio Setting 2nd Voltage Setting
38kV 33000V(L-L)/√3 3300.0 5.77V
27kV 22863V(L-L)/√3 3300.0 4V
15kV 10000V(L-L)/√3 3300.0 1.75V
6.1.4. CB Opening Time

Place the curser on “CB OPENING TIME” in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.
Recloser’s complete opening time is calculated as follows.
Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time + CB Trip Time (CB Opening Time + Arcing Time)
To apply TCC time to the complete opening time, CT trip time shall be considered.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CB OPENING TIME

[CB OPENING TIME] Range 0.000 ~ 1.000 sec
>Time: 0.016
Default 0.016 Step 0.001 sec
[0.000~1.000:0.001s]
※. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ERT300-R is
1.00sec and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s
Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The difference
between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec needs to be set
for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time compensates CB Trip
Time.
6.1.5. GAS SENSOR TYPE

Place the curser on “GAS SENSOR TYPE” in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / GAS SENSOR TYPE

[GAS SENSOR TYPE] Range NONE, TYPE1, TYPE2
>Type: NONE
Default NONE Step -
[NONE/TYPE1/TYPE2]
This is set in accordance with tank before delivery.
It is set depending on tank insulation method. If tank is gas insulated
type, it shall take TYPE1 or TYPE2.
NONE : It means non-gas type, Solid insulated type.
6.1.6. TIME ZONE

Place the curser on “TIME ZONE” in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time
Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module
option is installed.
Select standard time zone for user county. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synch by Time
Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Sign

[TIME ZONE] Range +, -
>Sign: +
Hour: 9 Default + Step -
[+/-]
Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction.
Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Hour

[TIME ZONE] Range 0~23 hour(s)
>Sign: +
>Hour: 9 Default 9 Step 1 hour
[0~23:1hr]
Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Min

[TIME ZONE] Range 0~59 min
>Min: 0
>Sync Time: 60 Default 0 Step 1 min
[0~59:1min]
Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.
NOTE
Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00);
Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0
The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type.
NOTE
If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be
happened as follows.
- If the "Reference Time Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in
ETMFC101_N can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
- If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event
transmitted is not correct.
GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Ref

[TIME ZONE] Range LOCAL, GMT
>Min: 0
>Tims Syn’ Ref: GMT Default GMT Step ~
[LOCAL/GMT]
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized
with Time Synchronization module.
NOTE : The setting is supported from version 3.6 of ETR300-R.
NOTE
In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if “GPS/IRIG?” setting is set
with "NO" in “GLOCBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, the time
synchronization module is not able to be used.
6.2. Communication
Place the curser on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has sub-
menu as below.
[COMMUNICATION]
>1.PROTOCOL SETUP
2.PORT SETUP
3.DIALUP MODEM
4.EVENT&ETC SETUP
5.FTP FILE TRANSFER
*.SAVE SETTINGS
6.2.1. Protocol Setup

Place the curser on “PROTOCOL SETUP” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETR300-R is set and it has sub-menus as below.
[PROTOCOL SETUP]
>1.DNP3 S1
2.DNP3 S2
3.IEC870-5-101
4.IEC870-5-104
5.MODBUS
ETR300-R supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and MODBOUS Communication

protocol. . This menu may be changed depending on User’s request.
Each protocol setting details are as below.
6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the DNP3 through communication port1,
port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to “DNP3 Protocol Technical Manual”
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/
DNP3 S1 or DNP3 S2” to select setting for DNP3 Protocol.
Setting items of “DNP3 S1” and “DNP3 S2” menu are same as following.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Function
Range DISABLE, ENABLE
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Function: ENABLE SLAVE1 : ENABLE
COM Port: PORT1 Default Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE] SLAVE2 : DISABLE
To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / COM Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range PORT1, PORT2, PORT3
>COM Port: PORT1
D/L Confirm: SOME SLAVE1 : PORT1
[PORT1 – PORT4] Default Step ~
SLAVE2 : PORT2
Select DNP3 communication port.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Confirm

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range NO, YES, SOME
>D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L FrameDly: 100 Default SOME Step ~
[NO/YES/SOME]
Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.
 NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.
 YES : Data Link Confirm is used.
 SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.
When Data Link Confirm use-setting, it shall be set as Host setting. If
the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be
failed due to Data Link Reset.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L FrameDly

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 10 ~ 5000 msec
>D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L FrameDly: 100 Default 100 Step 10 msec
[10~5000:10ms]
Set Data Link frame Delay Time.
In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time
when multi-frame occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Retries

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0, 1, 2
>D/L Retries: 0
D/L Timeout: 10 Default 0 Step 1
[0~2:1]
Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
layer.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>D/L Timeout: 10
A/L Timeout: 15 Default 10 Step 1 sec
[1~255:1s]
Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive
Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm
receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETR300-R will send Data
Link Frame again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / A/L Timeout

>A/L Timeout: 15
Master Addr: 65534 SLAVE1 : 15
[1~255:1s] Default Step 1 sec
SLAVE2 : 30
Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK)
from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data
transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Master Addr

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range 0 ~ 65534
>Master Addr: 65534
DNP Address: 1 Default 65534 Step 1
[0~65534:1]
Enter the master station address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / DNP Address

>DNP Address: 1
SBO Time: 15 SLAVE1 : 1
[0~65534:1] Default Step 1
SLAVE2 : 0
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / SBO Time

>SBO Time: 15
Init Unsol: ENABLE Default 15 Step 1 sec
[1~255:1s]
Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If no
operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Init Unsol

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Init Unsol: ENABLE
Unsol Time: 5 Default ENABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.
 ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
transferred.
 DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is
not transferred.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Time

Range 0 ~ 60 sec
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Unsol Time: 5 Default 5 Step 1 sec
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
[0~60:1s] Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is occurred.
Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within the time.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Type

Range NOTRIG, PERIOD
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Unsol Time: 5 Default NOTRIG Step -
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
[NOTRIG/PERIOD]  NOTRG: If there is no more event occurrence during setting
unsolicited time after the last event occurs, the event data is
transmitted.
 PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event
data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing
when the first event occurs.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Retries

Range 0, 1, 2
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG SLAVE1 : 0
>Unsol Retries : 0 Default Step 1
[0~2:1] SLAVE2 : 1
Set the Unsol Retries when there isn’t a confirm abouth Unsol message
from the main device.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Class 1

>Class 1: ENABLE
Class 2: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case
that Event is occurred in Class1.

>Class 1: ENABLE
>Class 2: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response to master in case Event is
occurred in Class2.

>Class 2: ENABLE
>Class 3: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select whether to send Unsolicited Response to master, in case Event is
occurred in Class3.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / TCP/UDP Select

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Range TCP, UDP
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
TCP Port : 20000 Default TCP Step ~
[TCP/UDP]
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port3(Ethernet).
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / TCP Port

TCP/UDP Select: TCP
>TCP Port : 20000 Default 20000 Step 1
[TCP/UDP]
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300R for TCP communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / UDP Port

>UDP Port : 20001
Master IP Oct1: 192 Default 20001 Step 1
[TCP/UDP]
Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300R for UDP communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Master IP Oct 1~4
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
Range 0 ~ 255
>Master IP Oct1:
>Master IP Oct2:
0
0
Default 0* Step 1
>Master IP Oct3:
>Master IP Oct4:
0
0
Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / keep Alive Check Tm

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Master IP Oct4:
>K-Alv Check Tm:
0
4
Default 4 Step 1sec
[O(OFF),1~600:1s]
Set the time period that check the communication connecting status
during the idle status.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Fragment Size

Range 64 ~ 2048
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
K-Alv Check Tm: 4
>Fragment Size: 2048
Default 2048 Step 1
[64~2048:1]
Set the size of DNP fragment.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Time Req(m)

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>Fragment Size: 2048
>Time Req(m): OFF
Default OFF Step 1
[0(OFF),1~30000:1]
Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
received from master station.
NOTE : The setting is supported from version 3.6 of ETR300-R.
6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-101 through
communication port1, port2 or port3.

IEC870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-5-101.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Function
[IEC870-5-101]
>Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
COM Port: PORT1
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Set an use of IEC60870-5-101.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COM Port

[IEC870-5-101] Range PORT1, PORT2, PORT3
>Function: DISABLE
>COM Port: PORT1 Default PORT1 Step ~
[PORT1/PORT2/PORT3]
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Address

[IEC870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 65535
>COM Port: PORT1
>Address : 1 Default 1 Step 1
[1~65535:1]
Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address for IEC60870-5-101 comm-
unication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~65535
>ASDU Addr: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 0 Step 1
[0~65535:1]
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~60000 sec
>ASDU Addr: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 60 Step 1 sec
[1~60000:1]
Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~255 sec
>Cyclic Period: 60
>Event Period: 15 Default 15 Step 1sec
[0~255:1s]
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Retries

[IEC60870-5-101] Applicable for lower than Ver 3.6 of ETR300-R : 0 ~ 2
>Retries: 0 Range
Conf.Timeout: 10 Applicable for Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R : 0 ~ 255
[0~2:1]
Default 0 Step 1
Set the Data retires number.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Retries: 0
>Conf.Timeout: 10 Default 10 Step 1 sec
[1~255:1s]
Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after
transfer the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time and
Data retries is available, ETR300 transfers the Data again.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Conf.Timeout: 10
>Max Poll Time: 10 Default 10 Step 1 sec
[1~255:1s]
Set the Data Polling period time.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>ADSU Addr Size: 2
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS Default 2 Step 1
[1~2:1]
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Confirm*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NEVER, ALWAYS
>ADSU Addr Size: 2
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS Default ALWAYS Step ~
[NEVER/ALWAYS]
Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>Link Addr Size: 1
>Rx Frame Size: 261 Default 1 Step 1
[1~2:1]
Enter the size of link address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
>Link Addr Size: 1
>Rx Frame Size: 261 Default 261 Step 1
[0~261:1]
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 255 sec
>Rx Frame Size: 261
>Rx Frame TO : 15 Default 15 Step 1 sec
[0(OFF),0~255:1s]
Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
receiving the frame sync.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
>Tx Frame Size: 261
>COT Size : 1 Default 261 Step 1
[0~261:1]
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COT Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 1 Step 1
[1~2:1]
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ IOA Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~3
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 2 Step 1
[1~3:1]
Enter the size of information object address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ One Ch Response*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NO, YES
>One Ch Response: NO
>Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Default NO Step ~
[NO/YES]
This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length
NACK when no response data available.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Fram Repet’ TO*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1~255sec
>One Ch Response: NO
>Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec
[0(OFF),0~255:1s]
Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application
layer timeout).
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1~255
>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default 5 Step 1
[0(OFF),0~255:1]
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination*

>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
commands other than set point commands.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination*

>CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
point commands.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt*

>CSE Termination:YES
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Default YES Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MSP Time-Tag**

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56
>MIT Time-Tag: CP56 Default CP56 Step ~
[CP56,CP24]
Select whether a time tag format for single-point.
 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag**

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56,CP24]
Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag**

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
>Flt Time-Tag: CP56 Default CP56 Step ~
[CP56,CP24]
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.

[IEC60870-5-101] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56,CP24]
NOTE : 1. The above settings marked with * shall be Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R to be
indicated.
2. In case ETR300 is the standard type, the above settings marked with ** shall be
Ver 3.9 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated.
3. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, the above settings marked with **
shall be Ver 4.10 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated.
6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through
communication port3.

IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-5-104.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Function
[IEC870-5-104]
COM Port: PORT3
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Set an use of IEC60870-5-104 communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ COM Port

[IEC870-5-104] Range PORT3
>Function: ON
[PORT1-PORT4]
Set a port for IEC60870-5-104 communication. It is fixed in PORT3.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~65535
>COM Port: PORT3
>ASDU Addr: 0 Default 0 Step 1
[0~65535:1]
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~60000 sec
>ASDU Addr: 0
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 60 Step 1 sec
[1~60000:1]
Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Cyclic Period: 60
>Time Out(t0): 120 Default 120 Step 1
[1~255:1s]
Select the Timeout for connection establishment.

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
[1~255:1s]
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
[1~255:1s]
Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message
( t2<t1).

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t2): 10
[1~255:1s]
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~255 sec
>Time Out(t3): 20
>Event Period: 15 Default 15 Step 1
[0~255:1s]
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ TCP Port No

Range 0 ~ 65535
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Event Period: 5 Default 2404 Step 1
>TCP Port No: 2404
[01~65535:1] Set the TCP/IP Port of ETR300 for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
[0~255:1]
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
[0~255:1]
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0(OFF), 1~255
>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default 5 Step 1
[0(OFF),0~255:1]
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ CMD Termination*

>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
commands other than set point commands.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ CSE Termination*

>CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
point commands.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Clock Sync’ Evt*

>CSE Termination:YES
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Default YES Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ MSP Time-Tag**

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56,CP24]
Select whether a time tag format for single-point.

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MSP Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56,CP24]
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag**

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56,CP24]
Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized
value for general event except for fault current event.

[IEC60870-5-104] Range CP56, CP24
>MME Time-Tag: CP56
[CP56,CP24]
NOTE : 1. The above settings marked with * shall be Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R to be
indicated.
2. In case ETR300 is the standard type, the above settings marked with ** shall be
3. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, the above settings marked with **
6.2.1.4. MODBUS Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through communication
port1, port2 or port3.

MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Function
[MODBUS]
COM Port: PORT3
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ COM Port

[MODBUS] Range PORT1, PORT2, PORT3
>Function: ON
[PORT1/PORT2/PORT3]
Select MODBUS communication port.
GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP/UDP Select

Range TCP, UDP
[MODBUS]
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP Default TCP Step ~
>TCP Port: 502
[TCP/UDP]
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port3(Ethernet).
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS / TCP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535
[MODBUS]
>TCP Port: 502 Default 502 Step 1
>UDP Port: 20001
[1~65535:1]
Set TCP port number of ETR300-R.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS / UDP Port

Range 0 ~ 65535
[MODBUS]
TCP Port: 502 Default 20001 Step 1
>UDP Port: 20001
[0~65535:1]
Set UDP port number of ETR300-R.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Address

[MODBUS] Range 1 ~ 254
>Slave Address: 1
Tx Delay: 0.05 Default 1 Step 1
[1~254:1]
Enter the Modbus address.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Tx Delay

[MODBUS] Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Slave Address: 1
>Tx Delay: 0.05 Default 0.05 sec Step 0.01
[0.00~300.00:0.01]
Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.
6.2.2. Port Setup

Place the curser on “PORT SETUP” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. ETR300-R communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has sub-
menu as below.
[PORT SETUP]
>1.PORT1(232)
2.PORT2(485)
3.PORT3(ETHERNET)
4.PORTF(232)
6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup

ETR300-R side panel PORT1 and related elements are set.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1

(232)” to select setting for PORT1.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Baud Rate
[PROT1(232)] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 9600 Step ~
[1200 ~ 19200 bps]
Select the baud rate for PORT1.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Parity Bit

[PROT1(232)] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
Baud Rate: 1200
>Parity Bit: NONE Default NONE Step ~
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]
Select whether to use Parity Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Data Bit

[PROT1(232)] Range 7, 8
Parity Bit: NONE
>Data Bit: 8 Default 8 Step ~
[7~8:1]
Select the Data Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Stop Bit

[PROT1(232)] Range 1, 2
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1 Default 1 Step ~
[1~2:1]
Select the Stop Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Modem Sel

[PROT1(232)] Range 2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE
>Modem Sel: 4W
>CTS Usage: ON Default 4W Step ~
[2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]
Select a modem for communication.
 2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is
monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).
 4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and
CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
 DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used.
 NONE : Not used.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ CTS Usage

[PROT1(232)] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Modem Sel: 4W
>CTS Usage: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select whether to use CTS signal or not.
 ENABLE : After confirm CTS signal is Asserted, transfer a data.
 DISABLE : Regardless of CTS signal, transfer a data.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ DCD Usage

[PROT1(232)] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>DCD Usage: DISABLE
>RTS Usage: AUTO Default DISABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Set whether to use DCD signal.
 ENABLE : After confirming DCD signal is Deasserted, transfer a data.
 DISABLE: Regardless of DCD signal, transfer a data.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ RTS Usage

[PROT1(232)] Range OFF, ON, AUTO
>DCD Usage: OFF
>RTS Usage: AUTO Default AUTO Step ~
[OFF/ON/AUTO]
 ON : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always ON(Assert).
 OFF : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always OFF(Deassert).
 AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of
ETR300-R is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of
ETR300-R is off.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ CTS CheckOut

[PROT1(232)] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>CTS CheckOut: 2
>DCD CheckOut: 5000 Default 2 Step 1 sec
[1~255:1s]
Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal
which informs that ETR300-R is ready to transfer a data. If there is no
CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not
transfer the data.
It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ DCD CheckOut

[PROT1(232)] Range 10 ~ 30000 msec
>CTS CheckOut: 2
>DCD CheckOut: 5000 Default 5000 Step 10 msec
[10~30000:5ms]
Set a delay time of DCD signal check which determine modem status
before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set
time, if DCD signal is ON, ETR300-R does not transfer the data and
treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ TX PreDelay
[PROT1(232)]
Range 5 ~ 500 msec
DCD CheckOut: 5000
>TX PreDelay: 10
Default 10 Step 5 msec
[10~500:5ms]
Set a tx pre-delay time. It delayed TX signal after CTS signal check.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ TX PostDelay
[PROT1(232)]
Range 10 ~ 500 msec
TX PreDelay:
>TX PostDelay:
10
50
Default 50 Step 5 msec
[10~500:5ms]
Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.
6.2.2.2. PORT2(485) Setup

Related elements with PORT2 in side panel of ETR300-R are set.
(485)” to select setting for PORT2.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Baud Rate
[PROT2(485)] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
>Baud Rate: 9600
Parity Bit: NONE Default 9600 Step ~
[1200 ~ 19200 bps]
Select the baud rate for PORT2.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Parity Bit

[PROT2(485)] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
Baud Rate: 1200
>Parity Bit: NONE Default NONE Step ~
[NONE/ODD/EVEN]
Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Data Bit

[PROT2(485)] Range 7, 8
Parity Bit: NONE
>Data Bit: 8 Default 8 Step ~
[7~8:1]
Select the Data Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Stop Bit

[PROT2(485)] Range 1, 2
Data Bit: 8
>Stop Bit: 1 Default 1 Step ~
[1~2:1]
Select the Stop Bit.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Line Type

[PROT2(485)] Range RS422, RS485
>Line Type: RS422
CA Delay: 1.00 Default RS422 Step ~
[RS422/RS485]
Select a physical port for communication.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ CA Delay

[PROT2(485)] Range 0.00 ~ 240.00
>Line Type: RS422
>CA Delay: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~240.00:0.01]
Set a delay time from data reced till transferring a reply data.
6.2.2.3. PORT3(EHTERNET) Setup

Related elements with PORT3 in side panel of ETR300-R are set.

(ETHERNET)” to select setting for PORT3.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT3(ETHERNET)]
Range 0 ~ 255
>IP Addr Oct1:
IP Addr Oct2:
0
0
Default 0* Step 1
IP Addr Oct3:
IP Addr Oct4:
0
0
Select the IP Address for ETR300-R.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT3(ETHERNET)]
Range 0 ~ 255
>Gateway Oct1:
Gateway Oct2:
0
0
Default 0* Step 1
Gateway Oct3:
Gateway Oct4:
0
0
Select the Gateway Address.
Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ SubnetMask Oct1 ~ 4
[PORT3(ETHERNET)]
Range 0 ~ 255
>SubnetMask Oct1: 0
SubnetMask Oct2: 0
Default 0* Step 1
SubnetMask Oct3: 0
SubnetMask Oct4: 0
Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETR300-R.
Subnet Mask Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
Subnet Mask Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ keep Alive Function

[PORT3(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE Default ENABLE Step ~
>K-Alv Idle T: 3.00
[DISABLE/ENABLE] Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting
status check function.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Idle T

[PORT3(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Func: ENABLE Default 4 Step 1sec
>K-Alv Idle T: 4
[0.01~600.00:0.01s] If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the
communication connecting maintainance status.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Interval

[PORT3(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Interval: 2 Default 2 Step 1sec
>K-Alv Retry: 3
[0~600:1s] After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any
reply during the setting time, check again the status.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Interval

Range 0~255
[PORT3(ETHERNET)]
>K-Alv Interval: 2 Default 3 Step 1
>K-Alv Retry: 3
[0~255:1] Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as
the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail
and close the communication connection.
6.2.2.4. PORTF(232) Setup

Related elements in front panel of ETR300-R are set.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORTF

(232)” to select setting for PORTF.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORTF(232)/ Baud Rate
[PROTF(232)] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200bps
>Baud Rate: 38400
Default 38400 Step ~
[1200 ~ 115200 bps]
Select the baud rate for PORTF.
6.2.3. Dialup Modem Setup

Place the curser on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu.
ETR300-R supports a Hayes compatible Modem on Port 1(232) for remote dial up access using
DNP3. For details, refer to “DNP3 Protocol Technical Manual”.
DIAL MODEM 1 menu has the sub-menu as below.
[DIALUP MODEM 1]
>1.CALLING STRING
2.CALLING NUMBER
3.INITIAL STRING
4.CONNECTION
6.2.3.1. Settup
Calling String
In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL MODEM1/ CALLING STRING”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING
[CALLING STRING]
Range ATD, ATDT, ATDP
>CS: ####
Default ATD Step ~
[! ~ z]
Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them.
 ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
 ATDT : Tone Dial
 ATDP : Pulse Dial
Calling Number
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL
MODEM1/ CALLING NUMBER”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER
[CALLING NUMBER] Range ~
>CN:0123456789XXXXXX
Default ~ Step ~
[! ~ z]
Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number].
Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space
shall be filled up by ‘X’.
Initial String
MODEM1 / INITIAL STRING”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING
[INITIAL STRING] Range ~
>IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
&D2 +CRM=129 AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0
[spase ~ z] Default Step ~
&D2 +CRM=129
Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
character, space or special character.
ETR300-R should be reset before making a phone call(connection).
NOTE : Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.
Connection
MODEM1 / CONNECTION”
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res’ TO
Range 0 ~ 255 sec
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 2 Step 1 sec
>Connect TO: 30
>Idle Time: 60 Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO

Range 0 ~ 255 sec
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 30 Step 1 sec
>Connect TO: 30
>Idle Time: 60 Setting the Modem connection waiting time.
If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a
connection failure after the setting time, the status of modem failure is
maintained.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time

Range 0 ~ 255 sec
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 60sec Step 1 sec
>Connect TO: 30
>Idle Time: 60 Setting the Modem connection close time.
During setting time, the connection is closed after the setting time.
6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup

Place the curser on “EVENT&ETC” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among the ETR300-R communication
protocol setting items.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP” to

select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP/ AEvt Method
[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range OFF, TH, DB, BOTH
>AEvt Method: OFF
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]
This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event
Active: in DNP point map.
 OFF : AI point event is not occurred.
 TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than
Threshold value.
 DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the
Deadband value
 BOTH : TH and DB all used.
 Use the ETR300 interface program to setting the “Event Active”
activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and
Deadband value.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / AEvt Skip at Ft

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range NO, YES
AEvt Method: OFF
>AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Default NO Step ~
[NO/YES]
Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated
during Fault pickup.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / Daily Max I

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
AEvt Skip at Ft: NO
>Daily Max I:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current
transmission.
 DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event..
 ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / Flt ‘I’ Evt

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range NO, YES, 1SHOT
>Daily Max I:DISABLE
>Flt ‘I’ Evt: YES Default YES Step ~
[NO/YES/1SHOT]
 NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
 YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event.
 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence
to Event.
NOTE :
The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when
becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Aver. Load Calc T

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range 1/2/3/4/5/6/10/12/15/20/30 min
Flt ‘I’ Evt: YES
>Aver.Load Calc T:15 Default 15 Step ~
>1~6/10/12/15/20/30m
Set the time interval for the calculation of average load current.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ BI Queue size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range 32, 64, 128, 256
>BI Queue size: 256
BI Evt Mode: ALL Applicable for lower than Ver 3.5 of ETR300-R : 32
>[32/64/128/256] Default
Applicable for Ver 3.5 or higher of ETR300-R : 256
Set the binary queue size.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ BI Evt Mode

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range ALL, LAST
BI Queue size: 32
>BI Evt Mode: ALL Default ALL Step ~
>[ALL/LAST]
Set the binary event mode.
 ALL : all status is buffed for same point.
 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Queue size

>AI Queue size: 256
AI Evt Mode: ALL Applicable for lower than Ver 3.5 of ETR300-R : 32
[32/64/128/256] Default
Set the analog queue size.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Mode

AI Queue size: 32
>AI Evt Mode: ALL Default ALL Step ~
>[ALL/LAST]
Set the analog event mode.
 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Queue size

>CI Queue size: 32
>CI Evt Mode: ALL Applicable for lower than Ver 3.5 of ETR300-R : 32
[32/64/128/256] Default
Set the counter queue size.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Evt Mode

CI Queue size: 32
>CI Evt Mode: ALL Default ALL Step ~
>[ALL/LAST]
Set the counter event mode.
 ALL : all counter is buffed for same point.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Time Syn’Type

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range LOCAL, GMT
>Time Syn’Type:LOCAL
Time Tag Type:LOCAL Default LOCAL Step ~
[LOCAL/GMT]
Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time
Synching with the master station.
NOTE :
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated
with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time internal clock in ETR300-R can be changed incorrectly at
time synchronization.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Time Tag Type

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range LOCAL, GMT
Time Syn’Type:LOCAL
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL Default LOCAL Step ~
[LOCAL/GMT]
Set the time type for event recorders in DNP Communication.
NOTE :
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated
with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the
time of event transmitted is not correct.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Frz Period

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Range OFF(0), 1 ~ 60000 min
>Time Tag Type:LOCAL
>CI Frz Period: OFF Default OFF Step 1 min
>[OFF,1~60000m]
Set the period to freez counter by itself.
NOTE :
1. In case ETR300 is the standard type, this setting shall be
2. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, this setting
6.2.5. File Transfer Setup

In this menu, sets about the file transfer. These are applied equally to DNP3.0 SLAVE 1 and
DNP3.0 SLAVE2 Protocol.
Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TREANSFER”

to select setting for file transfer.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Mode-R
Range DNP, FTPC, FTPS, USER
[FTP FILE TRANSFER]
>FTP Mode-R: DNP Default DNP Step ~
>FTP Mode-W: DNP
[DNP,FTPC,FTPS,USER] Select the protocol for file transfer.
 DNP: Read the file in DNP protocol method.
 FTPC : Read the file in FTP Client method.
 FTPS : Read the file in FTP Sever method.
 USER : Read the file in the user’s method.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Mode-W

Range DNP, FTPC, FTPS, USER
[FTP FILE TRANSFER]
>FTP Mode-R: DNP Default DNP Step ~
>FTP Mode-W: DNP
[DNP,FTPC,FTPS,USER] Select the protocol for file transfer.
 DNP: Write the file in DNP protocol method.
 FTPC : Write the file in FTP Client method.
 FTPS : Write the file in FTP Sever method.
 USER : Write the file in user’s method.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Dev

Range Space ~ ‘Z’
[FTP FILE TRANSFER]
>FTP Dev: REC Default REC Step ~
>FTD Dev.No: REC001
[space ~ Z]
Select the Device Type for FTP file classification..
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Dev.No

[FTP FILE TRANSFER]
>FTP Dev: REC Default REC001 Step ~
>FTD Dev.No: REC001
[space ~ Z]
Select the Device Number for FTP file classification
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP ID

[FTP FILE TRANSFER]
>FTP ID: ENTEC Default ENTEC Step ~
>FTP PW: 1234
[space ~ Z]
Set the ID of the device used for the connection with FTP.
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP PW

[FTP FILE TRANSFER]
>FTP ID: ENTEC Default 1234 Step ~
>FTP PW: 1234
[space ~ Z]
Set the FTP connection password .
GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Passive

[FTP FILE TRANSFER]
>FTP PW: 1234 Default DISABLE Step ~
>FTP Passive:DISABLE
[DISABLE/ENABLE] Select the FTP connecting method.
If “ENABLE” is selected uses Passive method. If “DISABLE” is
selected use Active method.
6.3. Event Recorder

Place the curser on “EVENT RECORDER” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Waveform and its related elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Capture
[EVENT RECORDER] Range ON, OFF
>Wave Capture: OFF
>Wave S/R: 128 Default ON Step ~
[OFF/ON]
Set whether to use Wave capture.
GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 16, 32, 64, 128 sample
Wave Capture: OFF
>Wave S/R: 128 Default 64 sample Step ~
[16/32/64/128]
Select a number of sampling for wave capture.
Captured wave cycle is 20cycles if 128 sampling is applied.
Captured wave cycle is 40cycles if 64 sampling is applied.
Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection.
GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 1 ~ 5 cycle
Wave S/R: 128
>Wave Pre-Cycle: 5 Default 5 Step 1 cycle
[1~5:1cycel]
Pre-cycle is to record(capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger
occurring.
Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For instance, if pre-
cycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 128, 5 cycle si
applied, the sampling number is 68, pre-cycle is 10, 32 case, 20 pre-
cycle is applied.
6.4. Monitoring
Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
[MONITERING]
>1.SYNCHROCHECK
2.OPERATION COUNT
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.BATTERY TEST
5.PQM
6.TD MONITOR
6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25)

Place the curser on “SYNCHROCHECK” in NOMITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu.
ETR300-R provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism
voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude, phase angle position, and
frequency.
If this feature is enabled, the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close with
the exception of automatic reclose for fault.
When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized, the synchronism check
can allow for local/remote close.
If ETR300-R is the type of CVD, the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load
side(VR phase) in recloser. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral
voltage Vr, Vs or Vt; for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb. on load side in recloser.
The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range OFF, ON
>Function: OFF
>D.V.Max: 0.50 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/ON]
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = ON, the feature is operational.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.V.Max

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
Function: OFF
>D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50 Default 0.50 Step 0.01pu
[0.00~1.25:0.01]
Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check.
Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this
level.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.V.Min

D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
>L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85 Default 0.85 Step 0.01pu
[0.00~1.25:0.01]
Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check.
Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this
level.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.D(V)

L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
>M.V.D: 0.10 Default 0.10 Step 0.01pu
[0.00~1.25:0.01]
Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages.
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.A.D(Deg)

[SYNCHROCHECK] Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0(OFF), 5~80 deg
M.V.D(V): 0.10 Range
>M.A.D(Deg): 15 Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 1 ~ 100 deg
[0(OFF),5~80:5deg]
Default 15 Step 1 deg
Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages.
An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below
this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz)

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 5.00 Hz
>M.A.D(Deg): 15
>M.F.D(Hz): 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 Hz
[0.00~5.00:0.01Hz]
Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages.
A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range ALL, R(AB), S(CB), T(AC)
>M.F.D(Hz): 2.00
>Sync Phase: ALL Default ALL Step ~
[ALL/R(AB)/S(CB)/T]
Select the synchronism check phase on load side.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Time delay

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0sec
[SYNCHROCHECK]
>Sync Phase:
>Time :
ALL
1.0
Default 1.0 Step 0.1sec
[0.1~180.0:0.1s]
Set a delay time of synchronism check.
6.4.2. Operation Count

Place the curser on “OPERATION COUN” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Recloser operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function
[OPERATION COUNT] Range OFF, ON
>Function: OFF
Limit: 10000 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/ON]
Select whether to use Recloser operation count monitoring.
If function is activated and operation counter is over Limit, Logic bit
DIGTCNT is set. Logic bit can be used for Output or Alarm through
Interface software.
Figure 6-1. DIGTCNT Diagram
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Limit

[OPERATION COUNT] Range 1 ~ 20000
>Function: OFF
>Limit: 10000 Default 10000 Step 1
[1~20000:1]
Set a number to alarm when Recloser operation number meets this set.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Count set

[TRIP COUNTER] Range 0 ~ 10000
Limit: 10000
>Count set: 0 Default 0 Step 1
[0~10000:1]
It is to set the same operation number of circuit breaker. Set value is available
after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to “MAINENANCE/ DATA
RESET / OPERATION COUNT or COUNT ALL”
6.4.3. Contact Wear

Place the curser on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move
into this menu. Recloser contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function
[CONTACT WEAR] Range OFF, ON
>Function: OFF
Pickup(%): 20.0 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/ON]
Select whether to use Recloser contact wear monitoring.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup(%)

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 0.0 ~ 50.0 %
>Function: OFF
>Pickup(%): 20.0 Default 20.0 Step 0.1 %
[0.0~50.0:0.1%]
Set a pickup value to alarm when recloser contact wear reaches set
value.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Rated Volt(kV)

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 15, 27, 38 ㎸
Pickup(%): 20.0
>Rated Volt(kV): 38 Default Note Step ~
[15/27/38kV]
Set the power line nominal voltage.
NOTE :
The power line nominal voltage determines the Recloser type.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt(kA)

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 5.0 ~ 50.0 kA
Rated Volt(kV): 15
>Interrupt(kA): 12.5 Default 12.5 Step 0.1 kA
[5.0~50.0:0.1kA]
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / No. Max I

[CONTACT WEAR] Range 1 ~ 999
Interrupt(kA): 12.5
>No. Max I: 100 Default 100 Step 1
[1~999:1]
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set

>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 Default 100.00 Step 0.01%
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
It is to set Circuit breaker phase A contact wear value in ETR300-R.
Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers
to “MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR”.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set

>A Wear Set: 100.00
>B Wear Set: 100.00 Default 100.00 Step 0.01%
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
It is to set Circuit breaker phase B contact wear value in ETR300-R.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set

>B Wear Set: 100.00
>C Wear Set: 100.00 Default 100.00 Step 0.01%
[0.00~100.00:0.01%]
It is to set Circuit breaker phase C contact wear value in ETR300-R.
6.4.4. Battery Test

Place the curser on “BATTERY TEST” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / Period
[BATTERY TEST] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour
>Period: 24
Default 24 Step 1 hour
[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]
Set a time period for automatic battery test.
6.4.5. Power Quality Monitoring

Place the curser on “PQM” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.
[PQM]
>1.PQM FUNCTION
2.INTERRUPT
3.SAG
4.SWELL
5.HARMONICS
6.CURR UNBALANCE
7.VOLT UNBALANCE
8.UNDER VOLTAGE
9.OVER VOLTAGE
10.UNDER FREQUENCY
11.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT
PQM functions follows IEEE 1159 standard.

IEEE 1159 standard determines under categorizing into several groups depending on electric
fluctuation depending on size and continuous time. Voltage fluctuation and its categories are as
shown in “Ficture 6-2 . IEEE 1159 Voltage distortion summary”.
Ficture 6-2. IEEE 1159 Voltage distortion summary
All PQM function is calculated under 128 sampling.
6.4.5.1. PQM Function
Place the curser on “PQM FUNCTION” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function
[PQM FUNCTION] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Default DISABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select whether to use PQM function.
If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled.
6.4.5.2. Interrupt
Place the curser on “INTERRUPT” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level
[INTERRUPT] Range 0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.49 pu
>Level: 0.30
>Time: 2.0 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 pu
[0(OFF),0.10~0.49pu]
It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality.
Detect level is set by multiplying selected value in here to source side
rated voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time

[INTERRUPT] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: 0.30
>Time: 2.0 Default 2.0 Step 0.5 cycle
[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
Set a interrupt detecting time.
6.4.5.3. Sag
Place the curser on “ SAG” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level
[SAG] Range 0(OFF), 0.50 ~ 0.99 pu
>Level: 0.90
[0(OFF),0.50~0.99pu]
Set a voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality.
Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated
voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SAG / Time

[SAG] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: 0.90
[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).
6.4.5.4. Swell
Place the curser on “SWELL” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level
[SWELL] Range 0(OFF), 1.01 ~ 1.50 pu
>Level: 1.20
[0(OFF),1.01~1.50pu]
Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.
voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SWELL / Time

[SWELL] Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle
>Level: 1.20
[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]
Set a time to detect voltage swell.
6.4.5.5. Harmonics
Place the curser on “HARMONIC” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup
[HARMONICS] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.0 Default OFF Step 0.1%
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay

[HARMONICS] Range 0.2 ~ 60.0 sec
>VTHD Pickup: OFF
>VTHD Delay: 1.0 Default 1.0 Step 0.1 sec
[0.2~60.0:0.1s]
Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup

[HARMONICS] Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 0.5 Default OFF Step 0.1%
[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]
Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay

[HARMONICS] Range 0.2 ~ 60.0 sec
>ITHD Pickup: OFF
>ITHD Delay: 1.0 Default 1.0 Step 0.1 sec
[0.2~60.0:0.1s]
Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion.
6.4.5.6. Current Unbalance
Place the curser on “CURR UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Level
[CURR UNBALANCE] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 100 %
>Level: 30
>Time: 4.0 Default 30 Step 1%
[0(OFF),1~100:1%]
Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality.
Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.
I2
UI rate   100
I1
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CURR UNBALANCE / Time

[CURR UNBALANCE] Range 0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
>Level: 30
>Time: 4.0 Default 4.0 Step 0.1 sec
[0.1~60.0:0.1s]
Set a detect time of current unbalance.

6.4.5.7. Voltage Unbalance
Place the curser on “VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Level
[VOLT UNBALANCE] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 100 %
>Level: 30
>Time: 4.0 Default 30 Step 1%
[0(OFF),1~100:1%]
Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality.
Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.
V2
UVrate   100
V1
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time

[VOLT UNBALANCE] Range 0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
>Level: 30
[0.1~60.0:0.1s]
Set a detect time of voltage unbalance.
6.4.5.8. Under Voltage
Place the curser on “UNDER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Level
[UNDER VOLTAGE] Range 0(OFF), 0.30 ~ 0.95 pu
>Level: 0.80
[0(OFF),0.30~0.95pu]
Set an under voltage detect level for power quality.
voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time

[UNDER VOLTAGE] Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec
>Level: 0.80
[0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Set an under voltage detecting time.

6.4.5.9. Over Voltage
Place the curser on “OVER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Level
[OVER VOLTAGE] Range 0(OFF), 1.05 ~ 1.50 pu
>Level: 1.20
[0(OFF),1.05~1.50pu]
Set an over voltage detect level for power quality.
voltage.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OVER VOLTAGE / Time

[OVER VOLTAGE] Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec
>Level: 0.80
[0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Set an over voltage detecting time.
6.4.5.10. Under Frequency

Place the curser on “UNDER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Level
[UNDER FREQUENCY] Range 0(OFF), 46.00 ~ 59.98 Hz
>Level: 59.80
>Time: 0.03 Default 59.50* Step 0.01 Hz
0(OFF),46.00~59.98Hz
Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time

[UNDER FREQUENCY] Range 0.03 ~ 10.00 sec
>Level: 59.80
[0.03~10.00:0.01s]
Set an under frequency detecting time.

6.4.5.11. Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit

Place the cursor on “ITHD/UBI I LIMIT” menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit

[ITHD/UBI I LIMIT] Range 0 ~ 630 A
>Limit: 60
Default 60 Step 1A
[0~630:1A]
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element
and current harmonic distortion element.
If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current
THD status point does not maked.
6.4.6. TD Monitor
Place the curser on “TD MONITOR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. It is to set Transducer to monitor DC Analog input.
 It has 5 channels of transducer, each transducer has 2 pickup setting values to detects the signal
size of input, monitoring in 2 levels the input sinal which is over than pickup setting value and
give the alarm.
 The no. 1 and 2 transducer can detect the battery and charger status by receiving the battery
voltage and charge section voltage in input signal and sending to the controller.
 TD3 is reserved for Gas type tank.
 User can use TD4 and TD5, these channels are current type of 20mA rated current.
 Input value in Transducer can be checked in metering menu.
Table 6-3. TD and Terminal Relations

TD Teminal(Input) H/W Spec. Purpose
TD1-1 Battery bad detection
Internal Battery Volt 40V
TD1-2 Power down mode
TD2-1 Internal Charger Volt 40V Charger bad detection
TD3-1 DC1(Side Pannel) 10V Reserved(GAS)
TD4 DC2(Side Pannel) 20mA User Avaliable
TD5 DC3(Side Pannel) 20mA User Avaliable

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Rate

[TD MONITOR] Range 1 ~ 200
>TD1 Rate: 40
>TD1 Ratio: 1 Default 40 Step 1
[1~200:1]
Set Transducer 1(TD1) monitoring range.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Ratio

[TD MONITOR] Range 1 ~ 3000
>TD1 Rate: 1
>TD1 Ratio: 1 Default 1 Step 1
[1~3000:1]
Set Transducer 1(TD1) ratio.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Offset

[TD MONITOR] Range -10000 ~ +10000
>TD1 Ratio: 1
>TD1 Offset: +0 Default 0 Step 1
[-10000 ~ +10000:1]
Set an Offset of Transducer 1(TD1).
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Type

[TD MONITOR] Range UNDER, OVER
>TD1-1 Type: UNDER
>TD1-1 PU: 21.0 Default UNDER Step ~
[UNDER/OVER]
Set Transducer 1(TD1) Under or Over. Under setting provides pickup
and alarm when it senses under the pickup value. Over setting provides
pickup and alarm when it senses over the pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 PU

[TD MONITOR] Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
>TD1-1 PU: 21.0
>TD1-1 Delay: 2.00 Default 21.0 Step 0.1
0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1
Set TD1 pickup value.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Delay

[TD MONITOR] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TD1-1 PU: OFF
>TD1-1 Delay: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Set a delay time of TD1.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Type

[TD MONITOR] Range UNDER, OVER
>TD1-2 Type: UNDER
>TD1-2 PU: 19.0 Default UNDER Step ~
[UNDER/OVER]
Set 2nd monitoring element of TD1.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 PU

[TD MONITOR] Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0
>TD1-2 PU: 19.0
>TD1-2 Delay: 2.00 Default 19.0* Step 0.1
0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1 nd
Set 2 pickup value of TD1.

the option type.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Delay

[TD MONITOR] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TD1-2 PU: OFF
>TD1-2 Delay: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Set 2nd delay time of TD1.
※. NOTE : TD2 ~ TD5, the same as TD1 above.

6.4.7. Fault Locator

The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase
of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type(phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground),
phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault
distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.
This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are
a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors
could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance
can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage.
For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data
is required at least 2 cycles.
If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily
achieved, but source impedance is not required.
Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow.
In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful.
The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.
Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 6-3. Faulted distribution
system circuit” for example.
mZ (1-m)Z
IA
IF L
O
VA
RF A
D
Ficture 6-3. Faulted distribution system circuit
The calculated “Fault Location” can be checked on the “Fault Cycle” event menu. For more details,
refer to “8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary”.
NOTE : “Fault Locator” function is supported from version 3.80 of ETR300-R.

The fault locator settings are as follows ;

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function
[FAULT LOCATOR] Range OFF, ON
>Function : OFF
Length(km) : 50.0 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/ON]
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 99.9 km
Function : OFF
>Length(km) : 50.0 Default 50.0 Step 0.1 km
[0.1~99.9:0.1km]
Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1-Resistive

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0
>Length(km) : 50.0
>Z1(RES) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
[0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1-Inductive

>Z1(RES) : 10.0
>Z1(IND) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
[0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0-Resistive

>Z1(IND) : 10.0
>Z0(RES) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
[0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
in actual ohms.
GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0-Inductive

>Z0(RES) : 10.0
>Z0(IND) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
[0.1~6000.0:0.1]
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence

6.5. Loop Control

The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation
area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs.
Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID point
Recloser, TIE point Recloser.
Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage).
Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC)
When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates,
the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence, Sectionalizing
Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the
current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live
line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR Function is operated and the load
side is disconnected.
MIDpoint Recloser(MID)
When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing
Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault,
then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to Alternate setting,
when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During TIEpoint Recloser
closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After recovering the fault,
connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting
and MIDpoint Recloser is closed.
When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects the
load side.
TIEpoint Recloser (TIE)

TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV.
When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and lockouts.
TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side
and when both side becomes DV.

LCD Initial Screen

Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, is displayed on LCD Initial Screen.
Press [ENT] KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.
LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] , [MID], [TIE]
Display a selected type.
VS: [DV], [LV]
Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or
Live line voltage.
VL: [DV], [LV]
LOOP CONTROL [TIE] Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live
VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ]
VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] line voltage.
AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage
of Recloser’s Source side.
VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage
of Recloser’s Load side.
AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.
LOOP CONTROL KEY

Use LOOP CONTROL KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel.
LOOP CONTROL ENABLED
Enable/Disables Loop control function.
Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled.
SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be
selected on OPEN status.
LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE

Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of SEC, MID.
Ficture 6-4. Loop Control Key
Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled.
Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation, Auto
Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset
values.

6.5.1. Setting
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL /
[LOOP CONTROL] LOOP CONTROL SUB SETUP MENU
>Type Select : NONE
>VRS to S/M : VS Place the curser on “LOOP CONTROL”, in GLOBAL SETTING
>VRS to Tie : VS
>VS Wire: 3PN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
>VL Wire: 3PN
>CAS to Mid: OFF
>CAS to Tie: OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE
>LC After Op:DISABLE
>OT Both DB: 5.00
>AR Time: 5.00
>DLV Max(%): 20.0
>LLV Min(%): 70.0
>DLPT Delay: 60.00
>LLPT Delay: 10.00
>DLRT Delay: 5.00
>NRT After LA: 15.00
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select

[LOOP CONTROL] Range NONE, SEC, MID, TIE
>Type Select : NONE
>VRS to S/M : VS Default NONE Step ~
[NONE/SEC/MID/TIE]
Set whether to use Recloser type and loop control function.
After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp
ON) to operate this function.
 NONE : Loop control is not in use.

 SEC : It is used for SECtionalizing recloser.
 MID : It is used for MIDpoint.
 TIE : It is used for TIEpoint.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M

[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL
>VRS to S/M : VS
>VRS to Tie : VS Default VS Step ~
[VS/VL]
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used
in SEC, MID.
Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage

 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie

[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
>VRS to S/M : VS
>VRS to Tie : VS Default VS Step ~
[VS/VL/VS&VL]
Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE.
TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
 VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage

 VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
 VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load
side voltage becomes dead line voltage
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 3PN Default 3PN Step ~
[Combination of ABC]
Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
CVD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.
 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 3PN Default 3PN Step ~
[Combination of ABC]
Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage
sensor(CVD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for CVD type Control S,T
phase are not measured.
 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / CAS to Mid

[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, ON
>CAS to Mid: OFF
>CAS to Tie: OFF Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/ON]
Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point :
Select whether to use automatic setting change in MID type. DV status
is remained for ‘LLPT Delay’ time, setting group changes from
Primary setting group to Alternate setting group.
To use this function, Loop control setting shall be the same in Primary
and Alternate setting group.
 OFF : Turn off auto change.

 ON : Turn on auto change.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / CAS to Tie

[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, VS, VL, BOTH
>CAS to Mid: OFF
>CAS to Tie: OFF Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/VS/VL/BOTH]
Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE.
Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting,
after set time(LL Regain T).
To use this function, Loop control(setting value) of Primary and
Alternate shall be set as the same.
 OFF : Turn off auto change.

 ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS.
 ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL.
 ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl

[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>LC After Op:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC.
To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by
Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is
coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled,
PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on.
 DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not

automatically activated.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)
 ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is
automatically activated.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op

[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>LC After Op:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Select After Manual Open : It is applicable to TIE type Recloser.
It is to operate Loop control function automatically when recloser is
manually opened by locally or remotely. When loop control function is
available, the user interface panel LOOP CONTROL ENABLED LED
is ON.
 DISABLE : After manual closing, loop control function does not

operate. ([LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button shall be pressed.)
 ENABLE : After manual closing, loop control function is
automatically operated.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DB

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>OT Both DB: 5.00
>AR Time: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE.
After TIE closed, source and load sides become dead line for a certain
period, TIE opens by Loop control.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / AR Time

>OT Both DB: 5.00
>AR Time: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID.
This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enable.
SEC operates Loop control(Automatic Open) if a voltage selected from
“VRS – S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage becomes
Live Line, a certain period later, restores (Automatic Close).
MID, if a voltage selected form “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line, and
when Loop control(“Chg Alt-Tie” is on, it automatically changes to
Alternate Setting.
Due to loop control operation, even if TIE recloser is closed and back
to live line, MID will trip and lockout if the fault is not cleared. After
clearing the fault and live line comes back, it is returned.(Automatically
closed and changes to Primary setting)

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DLV Max(%)

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 20.0 ~ 70.0 %
>DLV Max(%): 50.0
>LLV Min(%): 70.0 Default 20.0 Step 0.1 %
[20.0~70.0:0.1%]
Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage.
In Live Line, when a voltage is decreased below a set value, it
determines Dead Line.
In Source side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VS Wire”.
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LLV Min(%)

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 50.0 ~ 85.0 %
>DLV Max(%): 50.0
>LLV Min(%): 70.0 Default 70.0 Step 0.1 %
[50.0~85.0:0.1%]
Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage.
In Dead Line, when a voltage is increased over a set value, it
determines Live Line.
In Source side, it is figured form a selected phase from “VS Wire”,
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DLPT Delay

>DLPT Delay: 60.0
>LLPT Delay: 10.00 Default 60.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During “DL Pickup T”, the line
becomes Dead Line and “LL Regain T” Timer shall be operated so that
SEC, MID, TIE can operate.
“DL Pickup T” Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time
while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation.
Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by “DL rest T”
Timer. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or
recloser’s reclosing time.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LLPT Delay

>DLPT Delay: 50.0
>LLPT Delay: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : “DL Pickup T” shall be finished and
during reset time, the line shall not be Live Line.
SEC time setting (LLPT Delay) shall be more than 5 sec longer than
MID time setting for operation coordination.
After set time, SEC is opened, MID changes setting from Primary to
Alternate (‘CAS to Mid’ shall be ON). TIE changes setting group from
Primary to Alternate and automatically closed(CLOSE operation)
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Delay

>DLRT Delay: 5.00
>NRT After LA: 15.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Dead Bus Reset Time Delay : It is a delay timer to reset
accumulated time from “DL Pickup T”. This timer operates when “DL
Pickup T” is set and the line becomes Live line.
GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LA

>DLRT Delay: 5.00
>NRT After LA: 15.00 Default 15.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in
MID, TIE.
This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a
fault after Loop control.
After “LL Regain T” and changed Settings, while backward
distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set
time, MID reclose. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and
MID trips after a set time, reclosing is executed.
After “LL Regain T”, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set
time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips
after a set time, reclosing is executed.

6.5.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram
Ficture 6-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic

Ficture 6-6. MID Point Recloser Logic

Ficture 6-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic

6.5.3. Loop Control Application

6.5.3.1. 5-Reclosers Loop Control
For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of
MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side
to SEC-MID-TIE.
In “Table 6-4. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for
CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side.
Table 6-4. 5-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 CB2
Type Select - SEC MID TIE MID SEC -
VRS – S/M - 

VS
 VS
X VS
 VS
-
VRS – Tie - X X VS&VL X X -
VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN -
VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -
Cng Alt-Mid - X ON X ON X -
Cng Alt-Tie - X X ON X X -
LC After Cl - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -
LC After Op - - X ENABLE X - -
OT Both DL - X X 10.00 X X -
Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 -
LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 -
DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 -
LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 15.00 10.00 5.00 -
DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
NRT After LC - X 10.00 10.00 10.00 X -
PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -
PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -
Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.

5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Ficture 6-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
“DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate.
To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set
than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “LL Regain T” is enable,
SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting.
Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically,
and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region
shall be alive by backward distributing line.
Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after Auto-
Restoration Time.
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T”
operates.
MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time.
MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than MID.
When “LL Regain T” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically.
Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to
Alternate setting.
Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault.
F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to
Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time.
Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T”
operates.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3)
operate. When “LL Regain T” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting
automatically.
Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault.
distributing line.
Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3)
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous
normal line.

6.5.3.2. 3-Reclosers Loop Control
For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of
TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE.
In “Table 6-5. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1
side. And the source side bushings of RC3 is installed for CB2 side.
Table 6-5. 3-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 CB2
Type Select - SEC TIE SEC -
VRS – S/M - 

VS
X 
VS
-
VRS – Tie - X VS&VL X -
VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN -
VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -
Cng Alt-Mid - X X X -
Cng Alt-Tie - X ON X -
LC After Cl - ENABLE X ENABLE -
LC After Op - - ENABLE - -
OT Both DL - X 10.00 X -
Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 -
LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 -
DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 -
LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 5.00 -
DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
NRT After LC - X 10.00 X -
PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -
PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE X ENABLE -
Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.

Ficture 6-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
SEC, TIE has the same setting time.
SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than SEC.
When “LL Regain T” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2)
automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
distributing line.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto
Restoration Time.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

Ficture 6-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated
time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
When closing TIE(RC2), TIE(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1).
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

6.6. Passcode
Place the curser on “PASSCODE” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. Passcord can be changed in this menu. There are Passcord 1 and Passcord2. Passcord 1
is used for setting change of “Global Setting”, “Group Setting” and Passcord 2 is used for setting
change of “Communication”. The passcord change procedure of both passcord is same.
The procedure is same as below.
MAIN MANU\ PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 or 2
① In the screen ①, press the present password..
ENTER PASSCORD
0000 1) Use [▲], [▼] key to change the number and [ENT] or [▶] key to
move to the next space
② .
[PASSCODE1] 2) Press [ENT] key after setting the 4 passcord.
NEW PASSCORD
0000
In screen ②, enter the new passcord with the same above method.
③
[PASSCODE1] To save the new passcord, press [ENT] key in screen ③.
NEW PASSCORD
0000
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
When the changed password is saved, the screen ④ is displayed.
④
[PASSCODE1] If the password entered in screen ① doesn’t coincide, screen ⑤ is
NEW PASSWORD
0000 displayed and move to screen ①.
PASSCODE SAVED:0000
⑤ If press [FUN] or [ESC] key in screen ③ after passcord change, screen

⑥ is displayed and the changed passcord is not saved.
ENTER PASSCORD1
INVALID
⑥
[PASSCODE1]
NEW PASSWORD
0000
PASSCODE NO CHANGE!

6.7. PLC
Place the curser on “PLC” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[PLC]
>1.COMMON
2.DI/DO
6.7.1. COMMON
Place the curser on “1. COMMON” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[OMMON]
>1.LOGIC TIMER
2.PULSE TIMER
3.PULSE COUNTER
6.7.1.1. Logic Timer
Place the curser on “LOGIC TIMER” in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
 PLC has 16 logic timer.

 If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is
disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to ‘Fgure 6-12. Logic Timer
symbol’.
 X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.
 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM□.
 In PLC, B is output for TM□.
TM□
X
A B
Y
0s/0s
Figure 6-13. Logic Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU

[LOGIC TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TM1-PU: 0.05
TM1-DO: 0.05 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.
GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO

[LOGIC TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>TM1-PU: 0.05
>TM1-DO: 0.05 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1.
※. NOTE : TM2 ~ TM16, the same as above.
6.7.1.2. Pulse Timer
Place the curser on “PULSE TIMER” in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
 PLC has 16 pulse timer.

 When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time.
Please refer to “Figure 6-13. Pulse Timer Symbol”
 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM□.
 In PLC, B is output for PTM□.
PTM□
A B
Y
0s
Figure 6-14. Pulse Timer Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / PULSE TIMER / PTM1

[PULSE TIMER] Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec
>PTM1 : 0.01
PTM2 : 0.01 Default 0.01 Step 0.01 sec
[0.01~600.00:0.01s]
Set a output time of pulse timer 1.
※. NOTE : PTM2 ~ PTM16, the same as above.

6.7.1.3. Pulse Counter
Place the curser on “PULSE COUNTER” in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
 PLC has 16 pulse counter.

 Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it
reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and
increased count becomes 0. Please refer to ‘Fgure 6-14. Pulse Counter Symbol’.
 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET□.
 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST□.
 In PLC, C is output for CLT□
CLT
PC□
A X
Q C
B R
0
Figure 6-15. Pulse Counter Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / PULSE COUNTER / PC1

[PULSE TIMER] Range 1 ~ 60000
>PC1 : 1
PC2 : 1 Default 1 Step 1
[1~60000:1]
Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).
※. NOTE : PC2 ~ PC16, the same as above.

6.7.2. DI/DO
Place the curser on “DI/DO” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
[DI/DO]
>1.INPUT DEBOUNCE
2.OUTPUT PULSE TIME
6.7.2.1. Input Debounce Timer
Place the curser on “INPUT DEBOUNCE” in DI/DO menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
 Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input.

 Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal.
 In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is
disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to ‘Figure 6-15. Input Debounce
Timer Symbol’.
 In PLC, A is IN101~IN□ of Control Input, B is output for IN□.
IN□
X
A B
X
0s
Figure 6-16. Input Debounce Timer Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / DI/DO / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101

[INPUT DEBOUNCE] Range 0.005 ~ 10.000 sec
>IN101 : 0.020
IN102 : 0.020 Default 0.020 Step 0.001 sec
0.005~10.000:0.001s
Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.
※. NOTE ) ① IN102 ~ IN108 and IN201 ~ IN208, the same as above.

② Applicable for Ver 4.00 or higher of ETR300-R, IN301 ~ IN312 setting items are
indicated and the setting range is the same as above.
③ In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if “EX-IO?” setting is set with
"NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, external I/O unit
ETIO10 is not able to be used.

6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer
Place the curser on “OUTPUT PULSE TIME” in DI/DO menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.

 Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually.
 In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When
Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending
on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C
becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to ‘Figure 6-16. Output Pulse Timer Symbol’.
 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT□.
 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT□.
 In PLC, C is output for OUT□ and this output operates RELAY.
OUT□
A
Y C
B R
0s
Figure 6-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol
GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / DI/DO / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101

[OUTPUT PULSE TIME] Range 0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec
>OUT101 : 0.01
OUT102 : 0.01 Default BUFF Step 0.01 sec
0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s
Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.
※. NOTE ) ① OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT208, the same as above.

② Applicable for Ver 4.00 or higher of ETR300-R, OUT301 ~ OUT308 setting items
are indicated and the setting range is the same as above.
③ In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if “EX-IO?” setting is set with
"NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, external I/O unit
ETIO10 is not able to be used.

6.7.3. PLC Setting Example

The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur
within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical
mapping, refer to “Table 6-6. Operator Symbols”.
Table 6-6. Operator Symbols

OPERATOR DESCRIPTION
* “AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.
+ “OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..
! “NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.
( ) - This operation is performed first.

1 - When outputting directly, the output is 1.
0 - When outputting directly, the output is 0.
- Buffer output.
PLC logic setting example is as follows;
If user wants pulse signal output at OUT101 port during Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault
occurrence, set the PLC logic as the formula below.
Example: Logical Expression:

1) ITM01 = Y51P1T+Y51P2T+Y51G1T+Y51G2T+Y51N1T+Y51N2T+Y51Q1T+Y51Q2T
When any one of the following : Phase, Ground, S.E.F or NEQ Time Over Current(Fast/Delay)
fault occurs, Logic Timer 01(TM01) is outputted. The Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic
Timer 01 is set in “GLOBAL SETTING/ PLC/ COMMON/ LOGIC TIMER” menu.
※. NOTE ) Time Over Current Element related Logic Bit designation
① Y51P1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase

② Y51P2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase

③ Y51G1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Ground
④ Y51G2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Ground
⑤ Y51N1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – S.E.F
⑥ Y51N2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out – S.E.F
⑦ Y51Q1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – NEQ
⑧ Y51Q2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - NEQ
2) IOUT101 = TM01
Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output101 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse
Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in “GLOBAL
SETTING/ PLC/ DI/DO / OUTPUT PULSE TIME” menu.
3) BOUT101 = 0
As there is no block condition for Output101 port, 0 is always inputted.
The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as “Figure 6-17. OUT101 Output
Signal Logic Diagram”.
Figure 6-18. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram
PLC Editting Example

As shown in “Figure 6-18. PLC Edit Screen”, input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen
operating program then upload PLC data to ETR300-R. For more info, consult “ETR300 Interface
Software User Manual”.
NOTE : when editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.

Figure 6-19. PLC Edit Screen
6.8. Others
Place the curser on “OTHERS” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
[OTHERS]
>1.TIME DISP’ TYPE
2.PANEL SLEEP TIME
3.Vo SELECT
4.FACTORY DEBUG
5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE
6.H/W OPTION
6.8.1. Time Display Type

Place the curser on “TIME DISP’ TYPE” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu. It is to set Date Display for all related Menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / TIME DISP’ TYPE

[TIME DISP’TYPE] Range YMD, MDY
>Time Disp’Type: MDY
Default MDY Step ~
[YMD/MDY]
YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date
MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year

6.8.2. Panel Sleep Time

Place the curser on “PANEL SLEEP TIME” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / PANEL SLEEP TIME

[PANEL SLEEP TIME] Range OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
>Sleep Time: OFF
Default OFF Step 1 min
[0(OFF),1~100:1m]
Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key
operation on interface panel, ETR300-R goes into sleep mode.
6.8.3. Vo Select
Place the curser on “Vo SELECT” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / Vo SELECT

[V0 SELECT] Range H/W, SEQ
>Select: SEQ
Default SEQ* Step ~
[H/W/SEQ]
Select the zero sequence voltage used in ground over current Protection
element and SEF overcurrent protection element.
H/W : Use the zero sequence voltage as input voltage of side panel Vo
voltage input pin.
SEQ : Use the zero sequence voltage calculated by Va, Vb and Vc
voltage value.

the option type.
6.8.4. Factory Debug

This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.

6.8.5. Auto Setting Group Change

Sometimes, Recloser can be installed reversely against Power Flow(supply). In this case, it is
necessary to change Protection setting. ETR300-R has two option to help in this situation.
ETR300-R has two options Primary Setting and Alternate Setting. And these settings can be
selected automatically by “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” function.
Place the curser on “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into
this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / AUTO SGRP CHANGE / Function
[AUTO SGRP CHANGE] Range DISABLE/ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Interval: 30 Default DISABLE Step ~
[DISABLE/ENABLE]
Set whether to use Setting Group Change.
When this function is used, Primary setting is applied if power flow is
forward and Alternate setting is applied if power flow is reverse
(backward).
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / AUTO SGRP CHANGE / Interval

[AUTO SGRP CHANGE] Range 10 ~ 180 sec
>Function: DISABLE
>Interval: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec
[10~180:1]
If power flow is changed for this set time, setting group is changed.
Applying rules
 This function is operated when Power line system is in normal condition. During fault
detecting(pickup status) or in fault condition, it does not work.
 This function shall be operated when 3 phase voltages are more than 50% of rated voltage and
at least 1 phase has more than 10% of rated current.
NOTE :
The location of “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” menu depends on ETR300-R version.
- Applicable for Ver 3.7 or higer of ETR300-R : Within “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS”
menu.
- Applicable for lower than Ver 3.7 or ETR300-R : Within “GROUP SETTING” menu.

6.8.6. H/W Option

Place the curser on “H/W OPTION” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
The H/W option of ETR300-R is set in this menu.
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION / EX-IO?
[H/W OPTION] Range NO, YES
>EX-IO?: NO
GPS/IRIG?: NO Default NO Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether the external I/O unit ETIO10 is installed.
In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if this setting is set
with "NO", external I/O unit ETIO10 is not able to be used.
GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION / GPS/IRIG?

[H/W OPTION] Range NO, YES
>EX-IO?: NO
>GPS/IRIG?: NO Default NO Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is
installed.
In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if this
setting is set with "NO", the time synchronization module is not able to
be used.
NOTE : The menu is supported from version 3.80 of ETR300-R.

7. GROUP SETTING
Place the curser on “GROUP SETTING” in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this
menu.
[GLOBAL SETTING]
>1.PRIMARY
2.ALTERNATE
3.EDITBANK
4.SELECT SETBANK
5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE
GROUP SETTING menu has PRIMARY group, ALTERNATE group and EDITEBANK group.
Group is selected by ON/OFF ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED’ on ETR300-R panel. If
‘ATERNATE SETTING LED’ is OFF, PRIMARY group settings are applied, ‘ALTERNATE
SETTINGS LED’ is ON, ALTERNATE group settings are applied.
Figure 7-1. Alternate Settings

7.1. Protection(Primary, Alternate and Editebank Setup)

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE and EDITBANK group’s sub-menu are all the same as below. Sub-menu
are to set Protection elements.
[PRIMARY SETTING]
>1.OPERATION
2.INTERVALS
3.PICKUP CURRENT
4.PHASE FAST
5.PHASE DELAY
6.GROUND FAST
7.GROUND DELAY
8.SEF ELEMENT
9.NEG SEQ FUNC
10.NEG FAST
11.NEG DELAY
12.H/C TRIP-PHA
13.H/C TRIP-GND
14.H/C TRIP-NEG
15.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA
16.H/C LOCKOUT-GND
17.H/C LOCKOUT-NEG
18.COLD LOAD PICKUP
19.DIRECTION
20.VOLTAGE
21.FREQUENCY
22.USER CURVE
23.LIVE LOAD BLOCK
24.HOTLINE TAG
25.LIVE LINE
26.DEAMAND
27.OTHER ELEMENT
28.ON/OFF LEVEL
29.ALARM CURRENT
30.LOSS OF PHASE
*.SAVE SETTING
NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE
SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed
set value saved message’.

Protective Elements Block diagram - ANSI Designations
SOURCE
ETR300
EVRC2A
OPTION 1
CVD
VT V1, V2, 3V0
3VT
VT
OPTION 2
27 59 50P 51P
3CVD
CVD 81
TRANSDUCER
1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
Metering 67P
V, I, Watt, var, Hz, PF 1,2
CT
3WYE
25 79
1-4
I1
RECLOSER
46/50 46/51 46/67

I2
1,2 1,2 1,2
3I0
27
OPTION 2
1CVD
CVD
TRANSDUCER
OPTION 1
50G 51G 67G 51 67
VT 81 1,2 1,2 1,2 SEF SEF
1VT
ZCT
3I0
LOAD
Figure 7-2. Protective Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations

Protective Elements - ANSI Designations
Table 7-1. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations

ANSI
Protective Elements LCD Menu
Designations
Four shot recloser 79 GROUP SETTING/ …/ OPERATION and INTERVALS
Phase fast time overcurrent 51P1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ PHASE FAST
Phase delay time overcurrent 51P2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ PHASE DELAY
Ground fast time overcurrent 51G1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ GROUND FAST
Ground delay time overcurrent 51G2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ GROUND DELAY
Sensitive Earth Fault protection 51SEF GROUP SETTING/ …/ SEF ELEMENT
Negative sequence fast time overcurrent 46(51)-1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ NEG SEQ FAST
Negative sequence delay time overcurrent 46(51)-2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ NEG SEQ DELAY
Phase instantaneous high current trip 50P1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C TRIP-PHA
Ground instantaneous high current trip 50G1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C TRIP-GND
Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip 46(50)1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C TRIP-NEG
Phase High current trip lockout 50P2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA
Ground High current trip lockout 50G2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C LOCKOUT-GND
Negative sequence High current trip lockout 46(50)2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG
Cold load pickup - GROUP SETTING/ …/ COLD LOAD PICKUP
Phase directional time control 67P GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / PHASE
Ground directional time control 67G GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / GROUND
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault 67SEF GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / SEF
Negative sequence directional time control 67I2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / NEG SEQ
Under voltage 1 27-1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 1
Under voltage 2 27-2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 2
Over voltage 1 59-1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 1
Over voltage 2 59-2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 2
Under frequency 81U GROUP SETTING/ …/ FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY
Over frequency 81O GROUP SETTING/ …/ FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY
Synchronism check 25 GLOBAL SETTING/ MONITORING/ SYNCHROCHECK
Sequence coordination - GROUP SETTING/ …/ OTHER ELEMENT / Seq’ Coordi’
Loss of Phase - GROUP SETING/ …/ LOSS OF PHASE

7.1.1. Reclose (79)

After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose
interval time expires. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five, and each
reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer.
If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will
continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the
operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts. At this moment,
if make close operation remotely or locally, Lockout is released and fault detecting is activated.
Also, if the fault is temporary, the Lockout sequence of the Recloser is Rest by Reset logic.
If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic.
The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary, Alternate settings by one operating lockout
or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel.
The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings.
Operation Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA

[OPERATION] Range 1~5
>Lockout-PHA: 4
Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
[1~5:1]
Select the total number of the phase trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip
operations.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND

Lockout-PHA: 4
>Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
[1~5:1]
Select the total number of the ground trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip
operations.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF

Lockout-GND: 4
>Lockout-SEF: 4 Default 4 Step 1
[1~5:1]
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip
operations

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ

Lockout-SEF: 4
>Lockout-NEQ: 4 Default 4 Step 1
[1~5:1]
Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence
trip operations.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA

Lockout-SEF: 4
>Fast Curve-PHA: 2 Default 2 Step 1
[0~5:1]
Select the number of the phase fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining
phase delay curve operations.
※. NOTE : Total number of Recloser operation
= fast curve Operation No. + delay curve Operation No.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND

Fast Curve-PHA: 2
>Fast Curve-GND: 2 Default 2 Step 1
[0~5:1]
Select a number for the ground fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining
ground delay curve operations.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ

Fast Curve-GND: 2
>Fast Curve-NEQ: 2 Default 2 Step 1
[0~5:1]
Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast
curve operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining
negative sequence delay curve operations.
Intervals Setup
Set the reclosing time of phase fault (negative phase sequence included), ground fault and SEF
fault. The reclosing time is applied individually according to the fault type.
1) Intervals Setup – PHASE/NEQ SEQ’

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / … / Reclose 1
[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0.5 ~ 600.0 sec
>Reclose 1: 0.6 Range
Reclose 2: 2.00 Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 0.1 ~ 600.0 sec
[0.5~60.0:0.1s]
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
first trip operation and the close operation.

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Range 1 ~ 1800 sec
Reclose 1: 0.60
>Reclose 2: 2 Default 2 Step 1 sec
[1~1800:1s]

Reclose 2: 2
[1~1800:1s]


Reclose 3: 2
[1~1800:1s]
2) Intervals Setup – GROUND

The ground interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.
3) Intervals Setup – SEF

The SEF interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.
4) Intervals Setup – OTHER

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ Reset T(AR)
[OTHERS] Range 3 ~ 180 sec
>Reset T(AR): 30
Reset T(LO): 10.00 Default 30 Step 1 sec
[3~180:1s]
It is to select Reset time during auto reclosing.
During reclosing sequence operation, if current is back to normal for this
set time, recloser sequence is Reset. Generally, Reclosing reset time shall
be set longer than present reclose sequence time. During reclose sequence
time, if a fault current is removed, ‘Reset T(AR)’ time starts and during
‘Reset T(AR)’ time, a fault is detected again, Reset timer is reset.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ Reset T(LO)

[OTHERS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reset T(AR): 30
>Reset T(LO): 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]
To set Lockout reset time.
After recloser is closed by locally or remotely, within this set time, auto
reclosing is not activated. It is to eliminate reclosing sequence if a fault
current is detected after manual closing, and to have waiting time for
feeder stabilization. After this set time, Recloser function is activated.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ C/P Wait

[OTHERS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reset T(LO): 10.0
>C/P Wait: 60.00 Default 60.00 Step 0.01 sec
[1.00~600.00:0.01s]
Close Power Wait. : Waiting time to get power supply.
During reclose sequence, power supply is not enough to operate
mechanism, it counts for this set time and if the power supply is not
provided, then reclose sequence is stopped and lockout.
7.1.1.1. Lockout
The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions :
 When RECLOSE ENABLED LED is OFF and a fault current is occurred.

 When the high current lockout has occurred.
 After manual closing, a fault current is occurred within Reset T(LO).
 When recloser is manually opened.
 After TRIP occurs, the fault current is not removed or the recloser’s 52a contacts do not change
status of the recloser opened.
 After manual closing, Close Power Waiting time is over.
The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control
and the reset time has expired.
“Figure 7-3. Protection sequence containing 2F3D operations followed by lockout” shows
2F3D(2 Fast and three Delay) operation and lockout result. The total number of operation is set for
5times and Fast curve operation is set for 2 times. (3 times operation works with Delay Curve)

(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC(Fast) (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC(Fast) (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC(Delay) (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC(Delay) (8) 4th Reclose Interval Time
(9) 5th Trip - 5th TCC(Delay)
Figure 7-3. Protection sequence containing 2F3D operations followed by lockout
7.1.1.2. Reset
If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition, the reclosing sequence automatically
reset after passing the reset time interval.
If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time, the recloser will operate lockout after the
completion of the remaining sequence.
“Figure 7-4. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared”
shows that, after 3rd reclosing operation, the fault current is disappeared.
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
Figure 7-4. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared

7.1.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P)

The ETR300-R has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element
contained in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs.
The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase
time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an
inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time
adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time
overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates
faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time overcurrent
element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to
respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external devices
on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are
included in the ETR300-R.
A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the
ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the
recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as
mechanical relay reset.
If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control
or via SCADA, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period
specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element.
Phase Pickup Current Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
>Phase: 500
Ground: 250 Default 500A Step 1
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Set the pickup current of Phase Time Overcurrent Elements.
Phase Fast Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Curve

[PHASE FAST] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S
>Curve: [ANSI-NI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : ANSI-NI
[curves : total 50] Default
Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : ANSI-VI
Select the desired curve type :
 ANSI
- ANSI-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse
- ANSI-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse
- ANSI-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse
 IEC
- IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse
- IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse
- IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse
 ES
- ES-NI : KEPCO Normally Inverse
- ES-VI : KEPCO Very Inverse
 Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s
 KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4
 User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4
 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32

Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Curve A(101) B(117) C(133) D(116) E(132) IEC-EI K(162) L(107) M(118) N(104)
Setting 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Curve IEC-NI P(115) R(105) T(161) V(137) IEC-VI W(138) Y(120) Z(134) 1(102)
Setting 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Curve 2(135) 3(140) 4(106) 5(114) 6(136) 7(152) 8(113) 8*(111) 9(131) 11(141)
Setting 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Curve 13(142) 14(119) 15(112) 16(139) 18(151) N1 N2 N3 N4 ANSI-NI
Setting 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Curve ANSI-VI ANSI-EI ES-NI ES-VI USER-1 USER-2 USER-3 USER-4 DEF-1S DEF-10S
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Time Dial

[PHASE FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Curve: [ANSI-NI]
>Time Dial: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
Select Time dial, multiplying this value to selected curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
Time Add application.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Time Add

[PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
>Time Add: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Select Time adder, it is adding set value on the curve.
T-C curve delay time is increased as much as Time adder value.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / M.R.T

[PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Add: 0.00
>M.R.T: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
to T-C curve for more delay.
This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse
coordination.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Reset Method

[PHASE FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
M.R.T: 0.00
>Reset Method: INST Default INST Step ~
[INST/LINEAR]
In case that a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Fast
overcurrent protection is reset.
 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.
 LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s
Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[PHASE FAST] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
>Reset Method: INST Default OFF Step 1sec
>Low Set DT: OFF
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.
Phase Delay Setup

The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time
overcurrent setting process.

7.1.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G)

The ETR300-R has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element in
the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground
time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution
systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The ground time
overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse
time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder,
minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time
overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates
faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time overcurrent
element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user
interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely
coordinate with other protection elements within the ETR300-R and other external devices on the
distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in
the ETR300-R.
A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the
current level measured by the ETR300-R drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset
mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time
as mechanical relay reset.
or via SCADA, the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period
specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

The following setting is used to program the ground time overcurrent element.
Ground Pickup Current Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
>Phase: 500
>Ground: 250 Default 250A Step 1
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Set the pickup current of Ground Time Overcurrent Elements.
Ground Fast Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Curve

[GROUND FAST] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S
>Curve: [ANSI-NI]
Select the desired curve type :
For more details, refer to “Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation
characteristic setting range ”
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Time Dial

[GROUND FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Curve: [ANSI-NI]
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
Select Time dial, multiplying this value to selected curve. Multiplying
this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after
Time Adder application.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Time Add

[GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 1.00
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Select Time adder, it is adding set value on the curve.
T-C curve delay time is increased as much as Time add value.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / M.R.T

[GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Add: 0.00
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added
to T-C curve for more delay.
This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse
coordination.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Reset Method

[GROUND FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
M.R.T: 0.00
[INST/LINEAR]
In case that a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Time
Over-Current Elements is reset.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[GROUND FAST] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
>Low Set DT: OFF
operation.
Ground Delay Setup

The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time
overcurrent setting process.

7.1.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SEF)

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase
to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity
of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy
of CTs. For SEF element, ETR300-R has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be
connected in series with the provided phase CT’s(standard) or connected to a separate window type
ZCT.
The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current . The SEF element is enabled in the
Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED and SEF ENABLED on user interface
panel.
For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero
sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.
The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.
SEF Pickup Current Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / S.E.F

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 0.1~160.0
>SEF: OFF
Neq Seq: 500 Default OFF Step 0. 1A
[(0)OFF,0.1~160.0A]
Set the pickup current of SEF Elements.
In the case of ZCT, 0.1~160.0A as pickup current is configurable, while
in the case of general purpose CT, it’s recommended not to set below
2A as pickup current.
SEF Pickup Current Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / Time Delay

[SEF ELEMENT] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16 of
>Time Delay: 5.0
ETR300-R : 0.0~180.0sec
[0.0~180.0:0.1s]
ETR300-R : 0.0~600.0sec
SEF delay time set. If it is set for 0, SET element trips immediately on
pickup.

7.1.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46)

The ETR300-R has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence
element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence
overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The
negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping using
that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value, curve type,
time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and
both PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent
element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external
devices on the distribution system.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode
applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with
other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the
distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset
instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for
delay time as mechanical relay reset.
or via SCADA, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a
period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
NEG Seq Pickup Current Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq

[PICKUP CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
>SEF: 0FF
>Neq Seq: 400 Default 500 Step 1A
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Set the pickup current of NEG Seq Time Overcurrent Elements.

NEG Seq’ Function
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FUNC/ Function

[NEG SEQ FUNCTION] Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AR
>Function : OFF
Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
If function = TR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a
TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a
ALARM condition, Trip operates.
If function = TR&AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TR& AR condition, it trips and alarms.
NEG Seq Fast Setup
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S
>Curve: [ANSI-NI]
Select the desired curve type .
For more details, refer to “Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation
characteristic setting range ”
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Curve: [ANSI-NI]
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
Set Time dial which multiplies to a selected curve. It is performed after
Time Adder application. Time dial changes the slope of the curve.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Add

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Set a time adder. It is added to a selected curve. It is added on to T-C
curve delay time.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / M.R.T

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Add: 0.00
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Minimum Response Time setting. T-C curve trip time is faster than set
value, this set time will be used as delay time for trip.
This function is used for coordination with other device or Fuse.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
M.R.T: 0.00
[INST/LINEAR]
If a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Fast
overcurrent element reset is made.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[NEG SEQ FAST] Range OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
>Low Set DT: OFF
operation.
NEG Seq Delay Setup

The negative sequence delay time overcurrent setting process is very similar the negative sequence
fast time overcurrent setting process.

7.1.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)

The ETR300-R has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the
ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase high
current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the
phase time overcurrent elements. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary,
Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED on user interface panel.
Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase high
current trip.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Sequence

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 0(OFF), 1~5 shot
>Sequence: 1
>Pickup: 4000 Default 1 Step 1shot
[0(OFF),1~5:1]
If Sequence = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Sequence = 1, then Phase High current trip is enabled for the first
trip operation and every following trip operation.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A
>Pickup: 4000
>Time Delay: 0.00 Default 4000 Step 1A
[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Set the pickup current of Phase High current Trip Elements.
This value is the minimum operating current of Phase High current Trip
Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16 of
>Pickup: 4000
>Time Delay: 0.00 ETR300-R : 0.00~1.00sec
[0.00~1.00:0.01s]
ETR300-R : 0.00~10.00sec
Set Time Delay for Phase High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips
immediately on phase high current without delay.

7.1.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1)

The ETR300-R has a ground high current trip element. The ground high current trip element in the
ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground
high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or
faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. The ground high current trip element is enabled
in the Primary, Alternate settings both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in
user interface panel. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground
high current trip.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Sequence

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 0(OFF), 1~5 shot
>Sequence: 1
[0(OFF),1~5:1]
If Sequence = 1, then Ground High current trip is enabled for the first
trip operation and every following trip operation.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000A
>Pickup: 4000
[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Set the pickup current of Ground High current Trip Elements.
This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High current
Trip Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16 of
>Pickup: 4000
[0.00~1.00:0.01s]
ETR300-R : 0.00~10.00sec
Set Time Delay for Ground High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips
immediately on ground high current without delay.

7.1.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1)

The negative sequence high current trip in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as
connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a definite
time delay versus current.
The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster
than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence high current trip
element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION on user interface panel.
The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for negative
sequence high current trip.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Sequence

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 0(OFF), 1~5 shot
>Sequence: 1
[0(OFF),1~5:1]
If Sequence = 1, then Negative Seq’ High current trip is enabled for the
first trip operation and every following trip operation.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A
>Pickup: 4000
[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq’ High current Trip Elements.
This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq High
current Trip Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16 of
>Pickup: 4000
[0.00~1.00:0.01s]
ETR300-R : 0.00~10.00sec
Set Time Delay for Negative Seq’ High current trip. If it is set for 0,
trips immediately on ground high current without delay.

7.1.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2)

The ETR300-R has a phase high current lockout element. The phase high current lockout element
in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The
phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.
When high current lockout element is enabled, high current lockout element is operated prior to
any other phase protection elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value,
Lockout is operated.
The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to
the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of
permanent fault.
The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than
and phase high current trip element. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the
Primary, Alternate setting and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.
The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase
high current trip.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function
[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~5shot
>Function: 1
Pickup: 8000 Default 1 Step 1shot
[0(OFF),1~5:1]
If set 1 or other number, on this shot Lockout function is activated. For
instance, if it is set for 3 short, during sequence, from third reclosing
point, Lockout function is activated.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
>Pickup: 8000 Default 8000 Step 1A
[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Set the pickup curent of Phase High Current Lockout Elements.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16 of
Pickup: 8000
[0.00~1.00:0.01s]
ETR300-R : 0.00~10.00sec
Phase high current Lockout operation delay time setting. If it is set for
0, phase high current lockout element operate and lockouts
immediately on pickup.

7.1.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2)

The ETR300-R has a ground high current lockout element. The ground high current lockout
element in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs.
The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to or
faster than the ground high current trip element. The ground high current lockout element is
enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND
ENABLED in user interface panel. The ground high current lockout is not affected by the cold load
pickup scheme.
The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for
ground high current lockout.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 5shot
>Function: 1
[0(OFF),1~5:1]
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Set the pickup curent of Ground High Current Lockout Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT- GND / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16
Pickup(xCT): 4000
>Time Delay: 0.00 of ETR300-R : 0.00~1.00sec
[0.00~1.00:0.01s]
ETR300-R : 0.00~10.00sec
Ground high current lockout operation delay time set. If it is set for 0,
it operates immediately and lockouts on pickup.

7.1.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2)

The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the
negative sequence high current trip element. The negative sequence high current lockout element is
enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND
ENABLED in user interface panel.
Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be
enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Function

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 5shot
>Function: 1
[0(OFF),1~5:1]
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Pickup

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]
Set the pickup curent of Negative Sequence High Current Lockout
Elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] Range − Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.94 and Ver. 4.00~4.16 of
Pickup: 8000
[0.00~1.00:0.01s]
ETR300-R : 0.00~10.00sec
Negative sequence high current lockout operation delay time set. If it is
set for 0, it operates immediately and lockouts on pickup.

7.1.12. Cold Load Pickup

The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating caused by
the restoration of load supply or the cold load current of load side. ETR300-R provides “CLPU-
Type 1” to prevent the recloser from operating wrong by instantaneous inrush current occurring by
the closing of device on a power line and “CLPU-Type 2” to prevent protection elements from
operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a
long-distance line.
7.1.12.1. Cold Load Pickup – Type 1

The settings of “CLPU-Type 1” are separated and set respectively for phase, ground, SEF or
negative phase over current element.
In the state of the function to restrain the inrush current activated, the overcurrent protection
element will be operated under settings of “CLPU-Type 1” function at the restoration of load
supply.
NOTE:
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, the condition to decide the restoration of load supply
will be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A.
If “NO” is set, the decision is made when a recloser is closed (51A) by local or remote control.
When a distributed system is closed after long-time outage, the inrush current over overcurrent
pickup level may occur. At occurrence of the cold load pickup, ETR300-R increases the pickup
level of overcurrent element during a certain period of time, the Fast overcurrent protection
element is not operated and the Delay overcurrent protection element is always operated regardless
of the cold load pickup function. (The High Current Trip and High Current Lockout are always
operated regardless of the cold load pickup function)
If a fault occurs on distributed system, an overcurrent protection element is operated by the cold
load pickup function and a recloser becomes lockout after oneshot trip regardless of total number
of shots.
A power is lost and then after certain outage time, the algorithm of cold load pickup function is
applied at the restoration of load supply. If the “Make use ‘1’” is set to be “YES”, the algorithm is
applied when a load current becomes 0 and then it is restored after certain outage time. If “NO” is
set, the algorithm is applied when a recloser is opened and then after certain outage time, the

recloser is closed manually. If the fault current over the cold load pickup level occurs, the
protection element by the cold load pickup function is operated immediately.
If the power loss (opening or load current loss) is sustained for a long time more than certain
outage time, the pickup current of time overcurrent element is changed to be the setting value of
the cold load pickup current. After the restoration of load supply (manually closing or restoration of
load current), protection functions are normally operated when the Restore minimum time (RMT)
is expired.
Non Trip Area Trip Area

Time
Delay Curve
Current
Overcurrent Cold load
Pickup Level Pickup Level
Figure 7-5. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic
The cold load pickup function is operated according to the following rules.
The setting to use the cold load pickup function is set to be ON (set to TRIP or TR&AR), the cold
load pickup level is preset and then the cold load pickup function is activated at manual close or
restoration of load current.
If the level of over current occurring at the restoration of load supply is over the cold load pickup
current, the Lockout is done by protection function after oneshot trip (Refer the Inrush Current 1 in
“Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”).
If the over current is below cold load pickup current and overcurrent pickup current, protection
functions are not operated during a period of Restore minimum Time (RMT), (Refer the Inrush

Current 2 in “Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). After RMT, the
protection functions are operated. However, if the over current is dropped below overcurrent
pickup current during the RMT, the cold load pickup function is reset after reset time (Refer the
Inrush Current 3 in “Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”).
Current
Outage time Restore Minimum Time
Inrush current 1
CLPU Trip
Pickup Level
Inrush current 2
Trip
Overcurrent
Pickup Level
Inrush current 3
Time
Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic
If high current trip and high current lockout functions are activated and the fault current is higher
than the current setting of High current trip and high current lockout, the high current trip and high
current lockout functions will be operated prior to the cold load pickup function.

7.1.12.2. Cold Load Pickup – Type 2

In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over
current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy
load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time
overcurrent element during certain time (E-CLP time) defined by a user.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Up

At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is
risen as follows.
 Without SupplyTime 
Operational Cold Load Multi'  1    ( E  CLP Multi' 1) 
 E  CLP Time 
As example, when E-CLP Multi and E-CLT Time are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over 30
min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis set to
be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum
working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Down

If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over
Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1.
When E-CLP Multi and E-CLP Time are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the
cold load multiple in “Figure 7-7. Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows.
NOTE:
The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate
overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of TC curve is a minimum working
current.

Figure 7-7. Cold Load Multipilier
7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup

The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.
CLPU COMMON Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-PHA
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range OFF, ON
>Funct-PHA: ON
Funct-GND: ON Default ON Step ~
[OFF/ON]
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the phase does not operate.
ON : Cold load pickup function on phase operates.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-GND

>Funct-PHA: ON
>Funct-GND: ON Default ON Step ~
[OFF/ON]
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the ground does not operate.
ON : Cold load pickup function on ground operates.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-NEG

>Funct-GND: ON
>Funct-NEG: ON Default ON Step ~
[OFF/ON]
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the Negative sequence does not
operate.
ON : Cold load pickup function on the Negative sequence operates.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-SEF

>Funct-SEF: ON
PHA(A): 2000 Default ON Step ~
[OFF/ON]
OFF : Cold load pickup function on the SEF does not operate.
ON : Cold load pickup function on the SEF operates.
CLPU-TYPE1 Setup
This setting is to restrain the inrush current occurring at restoration of load supply.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / PHA(A)

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000A
>PHA(A): 2000
>Curve-PHA: [ N3] Default 2000 Step 1A
[0(OFF),1~20000:1A]
Set phase inrush current restraint value. Pickup value is calculated by
CT ratio times this set value.
※. NOTE : GND(A), NEG(A) and SEF(A), the same as SEF(A) above.

But, default value of SEF(A) is 20.0A.
※. NOTE : In the case of ZCT, 0.1~160.0A as SEF is configurable, while in the case of general
purpose CT, it’s recommended not to set below 2A as SEF.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Curve-PHA

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S
>Curve-PHA: [ N3]
>Time Dial-PHA: 1.00 Default N3 Step ~
[curves : total 50]
Set T-C curve to apply when Phase in-rush current is more than few
times of phase disconnect in-rush current. Applicable curve ragne
refers to “Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic
setting range ”.

※. NOTE : Curve-GND and Curve –NEG, the same as Curve -PHA above.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Time Dial-PHA

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Curve-PHA: [ N3]
>Time Dial-PHA: 1.00 Default 1.00 Step 0.01
[0.05~15.00:0.01]
Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application changes
the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.
※. NOTE : Time Dial-GND and Time Dial-NEG, the same as Time Dial-PHA above.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Time Addr-PHA

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial-PHA: 1.00
>Time Addr-PHA: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time
including its own delay time.
※. NOTE : Time Addr-GND and Time Addr-NEG, the same as Time Addr-PHA above..
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / M.R.T-PHA

Time Add-PHA: 0.00
>M.R.T-PHA: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~10.00:0.01s]
Minimum response time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time,
tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be
cooperated with other protection device or fuse.
※. NOTE : M.R.T-GND and M.R.T-NEG, the same as M.R.T-PHA above.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Outage Time

>SEF(A): 20.0
>Outage Time: 10.0 Default 1.0 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01]
Set a time to disable Cold load pickup. When recloser opens, ‘Outage
Time’ timer is operated. Within this set time, if recloser is closed, cold
load pickup is not operated. After the set time, if recloser is closed, cold
load pickup function is operated.
Figure 7-8. Outage time logic diagram
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Func-PHA

>RMT Func-PHA: ON
>RMT Time-PHA: 3.00 Default ON Step ~
[OFF/ON]
Set whether to use Phase Minimum operation current reset function.
ON : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT
time), Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and phase
overcurrent protection function operates(Pickup level is changed from
Cold load pickup to Overcurrent pickup level).
OFF : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT
time), Inrush current restraint algorithm remains. Lower than over
current pickup level shall be kept for Cold load reset time(Rst Time-
PHA set time) so that Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and
over current protection function operates.
※. NOTE : RMT Func-GND, RMT Func-SEF and RMT Func-NEG, the same as RMT Func-PHA
above.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Time-PHA

Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 60.00 sec
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range
>RMT Func-PHA: ON Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>RMT Time-PHA: 3.00
[0.00~60.00:0.01s] Default 3.00 Step 0.01 sec
Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load.
The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for overcurrent
detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal pickup level.

※. NOTE : RMT Time-GND, RMT Time-SEF and RMT Time-NEG, the same as RMT Time-
PHA above.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Rst Time-PHA

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 60.00 sec
RMT Time-PHA: 3.00 Range
>Rst Time-PHA: 3.00 Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
[0.00~60.00:0.01s]
Cold load pickup Reset Time setting on phase inrush current.
Inrush current that is lower than over current pickup level, is kept for
this set time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and normal
over current protection function operates(Pickup level changes from
Cold load pickup level to over current pickup level).
※. NOTE : Rst Time-GND, Rst Time-SEF and Rst Time-NEG, the same as Rst Time-PHA above.
CLPU-TYPE2 Setup
This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use ‘I’
[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range NO, YES
>Rst Time-PHA: 3.00
>Make Use ‘I’: NO Default NO Step ~
[NO/YES]
This setting changes the point of time to activate a cold load pickup
function.
If “YES” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a load
current is restored (over 2A).
If “NO” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a
recloser is manually closed by local or remote control.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / E-CLP Multi’

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 1.0~5.0
>Make Use ‘I’: NO
>E-CLP Multi’: 2.0 Default 2.0 Step 0.1
[1.0~5.0:0.1]
Set the multiple of cold load. If 1.0 is set, the cold load multiple is not
applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied
for overcurrent pickup current.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / E-CLP Time

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Range 1~720min
>E-CLP Multi’: 2.0
>E-CLP Time(m): 10 Default 10 Step 1
[1~720:1m]
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup
level is risen or dropped.

7.1.13. Directional Controls (67)

The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional
Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding
faults in different directions. The directional controls are composed of phase, gound, sensitive
ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements.
If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in
forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum
Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls,
add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
The directional controls have each three settings. The directional controls settings can be different
in the Primary and Alternate settings.
7.1.13.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)

Normal voltage V1 provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is
determined by comparing normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1). If an angle between normal
voltage(V1) and normal current(I1) is within  90˚, the direction is forward otherwise it is
backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Max torque
initial angle is set for lags Normal voltage V1 for∠60˚.( Initial set value of Max Torque angle shall
be set ∠60˚ lagging angle.
If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is
lost and phase over current is not detected. On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for
‘NONE’, regardless of phase direction, phase over current is detected.
Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase over current. Depending on control
type, over current can be detected in Forward direction or reverse direction or regardless of
direction.
Following “Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization” shows normal current
(I1) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane.

Ze
ro
To
rqu
eL
ine
FO
RW
O
RE
RD
VE
RS
E
Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization
The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type
[PHASE] Range NONE, FORWARE, REVERSE
>Type: FOR
M.T.A(V1): 60 Default NONE Step ~
[NONE/FOR/REV]
Set phase direction type.
NONE : Regardless of phase direction, over current is detected by
normal current(I1).
FOR : Over current is detected when forward phase direction.
REV : Over current is detected when reverse phase direction.
RIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / M.T.A(V1)

[PHASE] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: FOR
>M.T.A(V1): 60 Default 60 Step 1 degree
[0~359:1°Lag]
Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle
setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing
voltage.
For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be
approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / M.P.V

[PHASE] Range 0(OFF), 10~80%
M.T.A(V1): 60
>M.P.V: 30 Default 30 Step 1%
[0(OFF),10~80:1%]
To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing
Voltage, V1). It is available to check the direction when a votage shall
be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of
setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / BLOCK OC

[PHASE] Range NO, YES
M.P.V: 30
>BLOCK OC: NO Default NO Step ~
[NO/YES]
Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below
minimum polarizing voltage set.
NO : Trip on over current element.
YES : No trip on over current element.
7.1.13.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

Zero phase voltage 3V0 provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is
determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V0) and zero phase current(I0). If an angle from
zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is
forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359
˚. Initial set value of max torque angle is set for ∠60˚ lagging compared with Zero sequence
voltage(-V0).
Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground
over current is not detected. On the other hand, if ground direction control is set for ‘NONE’,
ground over current is detected regardless of direction.
Ground direction control type is set to detect ground over current. Depending on control type, over
current is detected or is not detected.
Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.

Polarizing Referance
-V0
Voltage:
Typical Fault
Angle
M.T.A= 60° Lag
Ze
I0
ro
To
rq
ue
Li
ne
e
Lin
ue
rq
m To
u
xim
Ma
FO
RW
OR
D
RE
VE
RS
E
V0
Figure 7-10. Phasor Graph for Ig Directional Polarization
The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type
[GROUND] Range NONE, FORWARE, REVERSE
>Type: FOR
M.T.A(-V0): 60 Default NONE Step ~
[NONE/FOR/REV]
Set Ground direction type.
NONE : Regardless of ground direction, over current is detected by
normal current(Ig).
FOR : Over current is detected when forward ground direction.
REV : Over current is detected when reverse ground direction.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A

[GROUND] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: FOR
>M.T.A(-V0): 60 Default 60 Step 1 degree
[0~359:1°Lag]
Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting
determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.
For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the
ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠60degree.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum
torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V

[GROUND] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 80%
M.T.A(-V0): 60
[0(OFF),10~80:1%]
Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction.
Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction.
Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF),
direction checking is disabled.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / BLOCK OC

[GROUND] Range NO, YES
M.P.V: 30
[NO/YES]
※. NOTE : The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional
controls. But, the default value of SEF directional element “Type” is Npne, and
default value of “M.T.A(-V0) is “90°” .
7.1.13.3. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))

Negative Sequence voltage V2 provides negative sequence pole direction in power system.
Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V2) and
negative current(I2). If an angle from negative sequence voltage(V2) to negative sequence
current(I2) is within  90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise,
reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Maximum Torque Angle
initial set value leads from negative sequence voltage(V2) for ∠60˚.
If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is
cancelled and over current is not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction control
type is set for ‘NONE’, over current is detected regardless of direction.
Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence overcurrent. Depending on
control type, overcurrent is detected in forward or reverse or both direction.
Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I2) direction polarity.

Figure 7-11. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization
The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / Type

[NEG SEQ] Range NONE, FORWARE, REVERSE
>Type: NONE
M.T.A(-V2): 60 Default NONE Step ~
[NONE/FOR/REV]
Set Negative sequence direction type.
NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, over current is
detected by normal current(I2).
FOR : Over current is detected when forward negative sequence
direction.
REV : Over current is detected when reverse negative sequence
direction.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / M.T.A

[NEG SEQ] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: NONE
>M.T.A(-V2): 60 Default 60 Step 1 degree
[0~359:1°Lag]
In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum
Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I2) against zero phase
voltage(V2) is set
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / M.P.V

[NEG SEQ] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 80%
M.T.A(-V0): 60
[0(OFF),10~80:1%]
Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage
shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise,
direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction
checking is disabled.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / BLOCK OC

[NEG SEQ] Range NO, YES
M.P.V: 30
[NO/YES]

7.1.14. Undervoltage (27)

In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two undervoltage
elements make a trip operation.
Undervoltage element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. It is available to select a number
of phase to be checked for undervoltage function.
The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent protective
elements.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the undervoltage element is disabled
from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all undervoltage
elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Undervoltage 1 Setup
The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Func’

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL
>UV1 Func’: OFF
>UV1 Pickup: 0.80 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TR condition, the device trips.
If function = AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a
AR condition, the device gives the alarm.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Pickup

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range 0.10 ~ 1.40
>UV1 Func’: OFF
>UV1 Pickup: 0.80 Default 0.80 Step 0.01pu
[0.10~1.40:0.01]
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.
For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage goes below 80V, enter(80/100) = 0.80 ×
VT for the pickup.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Delay

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
UV1 Pickup: 0.80
>UV1 Delay: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Select the definite time delay.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
>OV1 Delay: 5.00
>Voltage Type: 1P Default 1P Step ~
[1P/2P/3P]
Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage1 and Over-
voltage1.
1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.
2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.
※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / Min. V

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
>Voltage Type: 1P
>Min. V: 0.10 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
[0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage and overvoltage.
Used to prevent the undervoltage1 element and overvoltage1 element
for voltage below this level. Setting to 0.10 xVT will allow a dead line
to be considered a trip condition.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL Func’

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range OFF, ON
>NVCL Func’: OFF
NVCL TD: 30 Default OFF Step -
[0FF/ON]
Select ON/OFF to make Close operation when the linve voltage
becomes back normal voltage.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL TD

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range 0 ~ 60000sec
>NVCL Func’: OFF
>NVCL TD: 30 Default 30 Step 1sec
[0~60000:1s]
Set a delay time for close operation when normal voltage returns.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL TD

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range 0 ~ 60000sec
>NVCL TD: 30
>NVCL Rst TD: 30 Default 30 Step 1sec
[0~60000:1s]
After under/over voltage 1 trip, this setting time later, if line voltage
does not come back to normal, NVCL function does not operate.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 NVCL Lv

>UV1 NVCL Lv: 0.95
>OV1 NVCL Lv: 1.05 Default 0.95 Step 0.01 xVT
[0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
Set the lower bound of normal voltage.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 NVCL Lv

>UV1 NVCL Lv: 0.95
>OV1 NVCL Lv: 1.05 Default 1.05 Step 0.01 xVT
[0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
Set the upper bound of normal voltage.
Undervoltage 2 Setup
The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.

7.1.15. Overvoltage (59)

In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, two overvoltage
elements makes a trip operation.
Overvoltage element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. It is available to select a number
of phase to be checked for overvoltage function.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the overvoltage element is disabled
from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all overvoltage
elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Overvoltage 1 Setup
The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Func’

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL
>OV1 Func’: OFF
>OV1 Pickup: 1.10 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
If function = AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Pickup

>OV1 Func’: OFF
>OV1 Pickup: 1.10 Default 1.10 Step 0.01 xVT
[0.10~1.40:0.01pu]
required whenever the voltage exceeds 110 V, enter (110/100) = 1.10 ×
VT for the pickup.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Delay

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
OV1 Pickup: 1.10
>OV1 Delay: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
※. NOTE ) The closing function seting is applied equally as the under voltage 1 element in case
of Overvoltage detect phase number, min. operation voltage and normal voltage reset.
Refer to “7.1.14. Undervoltage(27)” avout the related setting item.
Overvoltage 2 Setup
The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

7.1.16. Underfrequency Load Shedding (81U)

The underfrequency load shedding element is activated to trip when the distribution system
frequency drops below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system
frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs
and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection(  ), VA-B voltage is zero
crossing and if wye connection(Y), VA-N voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.)
The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency
load shedding is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.
The underfrequency load shedding element should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / UF Pickup
[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0(OFF), 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
>UF Pickup: OFF
>UF TD: 2.00 Default OFF Step 0.01 Hz
[0(OFF),40.00~65.00]
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For
example, if the system frequency is 50㎐, and load shedding is required
at 59.5㎐, enter 59.50 for this setting.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / UF TD

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>UF Pickup: OFF
>UF TD: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / Min. V

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT
OF TD: 2.00
>Min.V: 0.10 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT
[0.00~1.25:0.01pu]
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency
element and overfrequency to Operate.
※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / Min. I

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A
>Min.V: 0.10
>Min.I: 0 Default 0 Step 1A
[0(OFF),0~630:1A]
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
underfrequency element and overfrequency to operate.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’/ NFCL Func’

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range OFF, ON
>NFCL Func’: OFF
NFCL TD: 30 Default OFF Step -
[0FF/ON]
Select ON/OFF to make Close operation when the frequency becomes
back normal voltage.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’/ NFCL TD

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0 ~ 60000sec
>NFCL Func’: OFF
>NFCL TD: 30 Default 30 Step 1sec
[0~60000:1s]
Set a delay time on closing after frequency becomes normal.
PRIMARY,ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’/ NFCL Rst TD

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0 ~ 60000sec
>NFCL TD: 30
>NFCL Rst TD: 30 Default 30 Step 1sec
[0~60000:1s]
After under/over frequency trip, this setting time later, if line voltage
does not come back to normal, NFCL function does not operate.
PRIMARY,ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’/ UF NFCLLv

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00Hz
>UF NFCL Lv: 59.80
>OF NFCL Lv: 60.20 Default 59.80 Step 0.01Hz
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
Set the lower bounder of normal frequency.
PRIMARY,ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’/ OF NFCLLv

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 40.00 ~ 65.00Hz
>UF NFCL Lv: 59.80
>OF NFCL Lv: 60.20 Default 60.20 Step 0.01 Hz
[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]
Set the upper bounder of normal frequency.

7.1.17. Overfrequency Load Shedding (81O)

In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency
element makes a trip operation.
Overfrequency element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. If VTs is delta  - connection
VA-B is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, VA-N.is to be zero-crossing.
Overfrequency Minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when
recloser is closed locally or remotely. During inrush current restraint algorithm running,
overfrequency load shedding function does not operate.
Overfrequency settings are as follows.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / OF Pickup
[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0(OFF), 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz
>OF Pickup: OFF
>OF TD: 2.00 Default OFF Step 0.01 Hz
[0(OFF),40.00~65.00]
Enter the level of overfrequency elements.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / OF TD

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>OF Pickup: OFF
>OF TD: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
※. NOTE ) Closing function setting in case of overfrequency min. operating voltage, min.
operating current and normal frequency reset is applied same as unerfrequency
element. Refer to “7.1.16. Underfrequency Load Shedding(81U)” for related setting
item.

7.1.18. Time Overcurrent Curves

The ETR300-R is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves , user-defined
curves and all 32 non standard recloser curves are available.
The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3.
The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :
ANSI/IEEE
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA)
IEC
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA)
ESB
USER-DEFINED
Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2))
Table 7-3. Curve Factor

TD Time dial
TA Time adder
α, β, γ Characteristic constant
M Multiples of pickup current
Rt Reset characteristic constant
NOTE :
1) “Time Dial” and “Time Adder” settings of each Time Overcurrent(Fast/Delay) menu are
applied to Time dial(TD) and Time adder(TA) respectively.
2) “Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸,
otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.

Related Setting Menu

Set user curves. 4 user curves are provided(USER CURVE 1~4).
1) USER CURVE 1
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a
[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
>Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0200 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
[0~150.9999:0.0001]
User defined curve factor α
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor a: 59.5000
>Factor b: 2.0200 Default 2.0200 Step 0.0001
[0~150.9999:0.0001]
User defined curve factor β
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor b: 2.0200
>Factor r: 1.8000 Default 1.8000 Step 0.0001
[0~150.9999:0.0001]
User defined curve factor γ
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor r: 1.8000
>Factor rt: 59.5000 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
[0~150.9999:0.0001]
User defined curve factor rt
2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 :
USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above

Standard Curve Coefficients
Table 7-4. ANSI/IEEE

Curves α β γ Rt
Moderately Inverse 0.0107 0.020 0.0231 1.0700
Normally Inverse 5.9500 2.000 0.18 5.9500
Very Inverse 3.985 2.000 0.095 3.985
Extremely Inverse 5.9100 2.000 0.0345 5.9100
Short Time Inverse 3.56e-3 0.02 1.95e-2 0.356
Short Time Very Inverse 1.9925 2.000 0.0475 1.992
Table 7-5. IEC

Curves α β γ Rt
Standard Inverse 0.1400 0.0200 0.0 9.700
Very Inverse 13.500 1.000 0.0 13.500
Extremely Inverse 80.000 2.000 0.0 80.000
Long Time Inverse 135.000 1.000 0.0 135.00
Short Time Inverse 0.0500 0.0400 0.0 0.500
Table 7-6. ESB

Curves α β γ Rt
Standard Inverse 0.011 0.02 0.042 9.000
Very Inverse 3.985 1.95 0.1084 3.985
Long Time Very Inverse 15.94 1.95 0.4336 15.94
Table 7-7. User Defined

Curves α β γ Rt
User1 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000
User2 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000
User3 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000
User4 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000

Table 7-8. Definite Time

Curves α β γ Rt
Definite Time 1sec 0.0 - 1.0 1.0
Definite Time 10sec 0.0 - 10.0 10.0
Table 7-9. Non Standard Curves

McGraw-Edison recloser curves
Phase Ground
Old New Old New
A 101 1 102
B 117 2 135
C 133 3 140
D 116 4 106
E 132 5 114
K 162 6 136
L 107 7 152
M 118 8 113
N 104 8* 111
P 115 9 131
R 105 11 141
T 161 13 142
V 137 14 119
W 138 15 112
Y 120 16 139
Z 134 18 151
Table 7-10. KEPCO Curvers

Curves
N1, N2, N3, N4

Curves
Table 7-11. Curve Characteristics
*. Curve time is Clearing Time.

*. Operation accuracy is +/-10% or +/-10㎳.
Table 7-12. Curve List

No Curve No Curve No Curve
1 A(101) 18 Y(120) 35 18(151)
2 B(117) 19 Z(134) 36 N1
3 C(133) 20 1(102) 37 N2
4 D(116) 21 2(135) 38 N3
5 E(132) 22 3(140) 39 N4
6 IEC-EI 23 4(106) 40 ANSI-NI
7 K(162) 24 5(114) 41 ANSI-VI
8 L(107) 25 6(136) 42 ANSI-EI
9 M(118) 26 7(152) 43 ES-NI
10 N(104) 27 8(113) 44 ES-VI
11 IEC-NI 28 8*(111) 45 USER-1
12 P(115) 29 9(131) 46 USER-2
13 R(105) 30 11(141) 47 USER-3
14 T(161) 31 13(142) 48 USER-4
15 V(137) 32 14(119) 49 DEF-1S
16 IEC-VI 33 15(112) 50 DEF-10S
17 W(138) 34 16(139)

1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
15.00
13.00
2 2
11.00
TIME(SECONDS)
9.00
7.00
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8
5.00 0.8
0.7 4.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 3.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08
0.05 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
6k
8k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-12. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves

2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE 60
40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
15.00
13.00
2 11.00 2
9.00
TIME(SECONDS)
7.00
1 1
0.9 5.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 4.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
3.00
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.50 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-13. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI VERY INVERSE 60
40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
15.00
13.00
1
11.00 1
0.9 9.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 7.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 5.00 0.5
0.4 4.00 0.4
0.3 3.00 0.3
0.2 2.00 0.2
0.1 1.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.50 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-14. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves

4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
60 60
: ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE
50 50
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 15.00 0.6
0.5 13.00 0.5
11.00
0.4 0.4
9.00
0.3 0.3
7.00
0.2 5.00 0.2
4.00
3.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 2.00 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 1.00 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.50 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-15. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
6k
7k
8k
9k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 15.00 1
0.9 13.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 11.00 0.7
0.6 9.00 0.6
0.5 7.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
5.00
0.3 0.3
4.00
0.2 3.00 0.2
2.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 1.00 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.50
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
3k
4k
5k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
2k
6k
7k
8k
9k
Figure 7-16. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves

6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 15.00 0.7
0.6 13.00 0.6
11.00
0.5 0.5
9.00
0.4 0.4
7.00
0.3 0.3
5.00
0.2 4.00 0.2
3.00
0.1 2.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 1.00 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.50
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-17. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves

7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC STANDARD INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 1 2
TIME(SECONDS)
0.8
0.7
0.6
1 0.5 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.4 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.3 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.2 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.1 0.2
0.1 0.05 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-18. IEC Standard Inverse Curves

8) IEC Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
500
600
700
800
400
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC VERY INVERSE 60
40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4
0.8
0.3 0.7 0.3
0.6
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.2 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.1
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
4k
6k
7k
9k
1k
2k
3k
5k
8k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
Figure 7-19. IEC Very Inverse Curves

9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08
1.00 0.08
0.07 0. 8 0.07
0.06 0. 7 0.06
0.05 0.6 0.05
0.04 0.5 0.04

0. 4
0.03 0.03
0.3
0.02 0.02
0. 2
0.1
0.05
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-20. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
1.00
4 4
0.8
3 0.7 3
0.6
0.5
2 2
0.4
TIME(SECONDS)
0. 3
1 1
0.9 0.2 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.1
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.05
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-21. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
1.00
0.3 0.3
0.8
0.7
0.2 0.6 0.2
0.5
0.4
0.1 0.3 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.2
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.1
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.05
0.01 0.01
4k
200
400
500
600
700
1k
2k
3k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
300
800
900
Figure 7-22. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

12) ESB Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ESB INVERSE 60
40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 15.00 3
13.00
2
11.00 2
9.00
TIME(SECONDS)
7.00
1 5.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 4.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 3.00 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 2.00 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 1.00 0.2
0.1 0.50 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
Figure 7-23. ESB Inverse Curves

13) ESB Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ESB VERY INVERSE 60
40
VARIATIONS ± 5% 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
15.00
TIME(SECONDS)
13.00
11.00
1 9.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 7.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
5.00
0.5 0.5
4.00
0.4 0.4
3.00
0.3 0.3
2.00
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-24. ESB Very Inverse Curves

14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 15.00 7
6 6
13.00
5 11.00 5
4 9.00 4
3 7.00 3
5.00
2 2
4.00
TIME(SECONDS)
3.00
1 1
0.9 2.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.50
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-25. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves

15) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : D1, D2 60
30 30
20 20
10 D2 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 D1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
4k
200
400
500
600
700
1k
2k
3k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
300
800
900
Figure 7-26. Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)

16) KEPCO Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4)
Figure 7-27. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)

17) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : A, B, C, D, E 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 C 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
B
0.06 D E 0.06
0.05 0.05
A
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-28. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

18) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)
Figure 7-29. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)

19) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : P, R, T, V 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
V
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1
T 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 R 0.06
0.05 P 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1k
3k
8k
9k
10k
Figure 7-30. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

20) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : W, Y, Z 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
Z
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
W
0.2 0.2
Y
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
4k
200
400
500
600
700
1k
2k
3k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
300
800
900
Figure 7-31. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

21) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
6k
7k
8k
9k
5k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 3 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
2
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 4 0.07
0.06 1 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

22) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
100
200
300
500
600
700
800
400
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 60
: 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9
30 7 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 9 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
8
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 8* 0.05
6
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
6k
7k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
8k
9k
Figure 7-33. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

23) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

24) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : F, H, J, KG 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
F J
0.1 KG 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
H
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-35. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

7.1.19. Live Load Block

It is to block reloser closing if the load side is live line.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Function

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range OFF, REC, CLOSE, BOTH
>Funcktion: OFF
>Live Level: 0.80 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/REC/CLOSE/BOTH]
Select whether to use Live load block function.
OFF : Live load block function does not work.
REC : When recloser closing by auto reclosing function, this function
works.
CLOSE : When local or remote closing, the function works.
BOTH :When recloser closing regardless of auto reclosing or
remote/local closing, the function works.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Live Level

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range 0.10 ~ 0.90 pu
>Funcktion: OFF
>Live Level: 0.80 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 pu
[0.10~0.90:0.01pu]
Set pickup level of live line
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Detect Time

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Range 0 ~ 60000 msec
>Live Level: 0.80
>Detect Time: 5 Default 5 Step 5 msec
[0~60000:5ms]
Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if
load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.

7.1.20. Hotline Tag

When “HOT LINE TAG” LEN is ON in the front panel, the over current protection function is
operated with the setting value of this menu. Also, Lockout with 1 time trip even the reclosing
function is activated.
The Hot Line Tag function is composed of phase, gound, sensitive ground, and negative sequence
overcurrent elements. The setting items of each element are same with the over current protection
element. Refer to “PHASE FAST”, “GROUND FAST”, “SEF ELEMENT” and “NEG SEQ FAST”
menu.
7.1.21. Live Line

ETR300 has Line line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintais over live
detec level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as
below.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv
[LIVE LINE] Range 0.10 ~ 0.90 pu
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
>Live Line Tm: 4.0 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 pu
[0.10~0.90:0.01pu]
Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Tm

[LIVE LINE] Range 0.0 ~18 0.0sec
>Live Line Lv: 0.30
>Live Line Tm: 4.0 Default 4.0 Step 0.1sec
[0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Set the delay time of live detec element.

7.1.22. Demand Current

ETR300 has Demand detect element.When Demand currnet over the detect level is maintained a
constant time during the detect element activation, this element is detected. The detect level and
delay time can be set individually per phase, ground and negative sequence element.
Demand detect setting items are same as following.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ Function
[DEMAND] Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL
>Function: OFF
>Interval: 5 Default TRIP Step ~
[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
If function = Trip & AL, the feature is operational. When the feature
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ Interval

[DEMAND] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
>Function: OFF
>Interval: 5 Default 5 min Step ~
[5/10/15/20/30/60m]
Set the time interval to calculate the Demand current..
When current of constant size flows, it is the time that the Demand
current reachs the 90% of present current size.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ PHA Pickup

[DEMAND] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
>PHA Pickup: 600
>PHA T Delay: 10.00 Default 600 Step 1A
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Set the Pickup current of phase Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ PHA Time Delay

[DEMAND] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>PHA Pickup: 600
>PHA T Delay: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Set the detect delay time of phase Demand element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ GND Pickup

>GND Pickup: 300
>GND T Delay: 10.00 Default 300 Step 1A
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Set the Pickup current of ground Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ GND Time Delay

>GND Pickup: 300
>GND T Delay: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Set the detect delay time of ground Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ NEQ Pickup

>NEQ Pickup: 600
>NEQ T Delay: 10.00 Default 600 Step 1A
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]
Set the Pickup current of negative phase sequence Demand element.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ NEQTime Delay

>NEQ Pickup: 600
>NEQ T Delay: 10.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01s]
Set the detect delay time of negative phase sequence Demand element.

7.1.23. Other Element
7.1.23.1. Sequence Coordination

When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, ETR300-R contains
Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Back-
up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination feature is activated
only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault
current.
The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature.
1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations
and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series.
2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series.
3) To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms)
should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to those
of Down-line Reclosers.
4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all
Down-line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during
the reclose operation of Down-lines.
The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi'
[ OTHER ELEMENT ] Range OFF, ON
>Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
L.O Priority: GND Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/ON]
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary
operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are
connected in series.


As shown in “Figure 7-36. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence

Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution
systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements. During the count
at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line
Recloser , the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step.
Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at
the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence
Coordination function can not be operated.
Increase Trip Counter without Trip
Starting
Reset Time
Counter
Close
Back Up EVR 1 Open
Close
Down line EVR 2
Lockout Status
Open
Time
Faulted
Figure 7-36. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram

7.1.23.2. Others
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / L.O Priority

[OTHER ELEMENT] Range PHA, GND
Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
>L.O Priority: PHA Default GND Step ~
[PHA/GND]
Lockout priority
PHA : Phase prior
GND : Ground prior
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset

[OTHER ELEMENT] Range AUTO, MANUAL
L.O Priority: PHA
>F/I Reset: AUTO Default AUTO Step ~
[AUTO/MANUAL]
Faulted Indicator reset method
AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or

shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes
normal.
MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close

[OTHER ELEMENT] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
F/I Reset: AUTO
>D/T M-Close: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.00~600.00:0.01]
Time delay for manual close

7.1.24. Phase Open/Loss

This function determine Phase open/loss in case that one or two phases voltages are more than Off
Level and, determine normal in case that all three phases voltages are higher than On Level, the
function is released. Under normal condition and does not indicate Phase open/loss.
The setting items of Phase Open/Loss detec element are same as below.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / On Level
[ON/OFF LEVEL] Range 0.70 ~ 0.85 pu
>On Level: 0.80
>Off Level: 0.50 Default 0.80 Step 0.01 pu
[0.70~0.85:0.01pu]
Set normal voltage level.
This setting is applied with the multiple of rated voltage.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / Off Level

[ON/OFF LEVEL] Range 0.30 ~ 0.75 pu
>On Level: 0.80
>Off Level: 0.50 Default 0.50 Step 0.01 pu
[0.30~0.75:0.01pu]
Set phase open/loss level.
This setting is applied with the multiple of rated voltage.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / Time
[ON/OFF LEVEL]
Range 0.0 ~ 180.0sec
>Off Level:
>Time :
0.50
4.0
[0.1~180.0:0.1s]
Set delay time of phase open/loss.

7.1.25. Alarm Current

ETR300 occures an Alarm Current event when over the detect level of RMS current maintains a
constant time. Alarm Current event is occurred individually per A, B, C, N phase and Negative
Sequence.
Alarm Current setting items are same as below.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / PHA-Pickup
[OVER CURRENT] Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A
>PHA-Pickup: 400
>PHA-Time: 2.0 Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.4 of ETR300-R : 400
[0(OFF),10~1600:1A] Default
Applicable for Ver. 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : OFF
Step 1A
Set the detect current of Alarm Current about phase current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / PHA-Time
[OVER CURRENT]
Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec
>PHA-Pickup:
>PHA-Time:
400
2.0
[0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Set the detect time of alarm Current about the phase current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / GND-Pickup

>GND-Pickup: 70
>GND-Time: 2.0 Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.4 of ETR300-R : 70
Step 1A
Set the detect current of Alarm Current about ground current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / GND-Time
[OVER CURRENT]
Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec
>GND-Pickup:
>GND-Time:
70
2.0
[0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Set the detect time of Alarm Current about ground current.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / NEG-Pickup

>NEG-Pickup: 400
>NEG-Time: 2.0 Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.4 of ETR300-R : 400
Step 1A
Set the detect current of Alarm Current about the negative seq’ current.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / NEG -Time
[OVER CURRENT]
Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec
>NEG-Pickup:
>NEG -Time:
400
2.0
[0.0~180.0:0.1s]
Set the detect time of alarm Current about the negative seq’ current.

7.1.26. Loss of Phase

ETR300-R has a loss of phase element. The element is provided for trip, alarm and control when
loss of phase is occurred. Loss of Phase can be turned on and off by Primary and Alternate settings
and is an optional element depending on the specification of ETR300-R.
If any phase voltage of source side becomes 110% higher than Loss of Phase level and one or two
phases voltage keeps lower than Loss of Phase for a certain period, circuit breaker determines Loss
of Phase.
The loss of phase element in the following four settings should be enabled for loss of phase.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Function

[ LOSS OF PHASE ] Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL
>Function: OFF
Pickup: 0.30 Default OFF Step ~
[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]
If function = Trip & AL, the feature is operational. When the feature
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Pickup

[ LOSS OF PHASE ] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT
>Function: OFF
>Pickup: 0.30 Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT
[0.00~1.25:0.1pu]
required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(30/100) = 0.30 ×
VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Time Delay

[LOSS OF PHASE ] Range 0.10 ~ 100.00 sec
Pickup: 0.30
>Time Delay: 20.00 Default 20.00 Step 0.01 sec
[0.10~100.00:0.01s]
The time set-up is to delay time for loss of phase trip(or alarm).

7.2. Select Setbank

ETR300 has 6 Setbank and it can have 6 different settings.
Primary setting is default setting which works with forwarding Power flow. Alternate settings is
used if it requires of small changes in Primary settings or backward power flow, or because of the
user’s needs. Edit setting is used for quick and convenient setting change.
GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / PRIMARY
[SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6
>Primary: BANK1
Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK1 Step ~
[BANK1 ~ BANK6]
Select a Bank of Primary setting group.
GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / ALTERNATE

>Primary: BANK1
>Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK2 Default ~
[BANK1 ~ BANK6]
Select a bank of Alternate setting group.
GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / EDIT

>Alternate: BANK2
>Edit: BANK3 Default BANK3 Default ~
[BANK1 ~ BANK6]
Select a bank of Edit.

8. EVENT RECORDER
Place the curser on “3.EVENT”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
ETR300-R records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as
operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All
events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all
events can be checked in interface program.
This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[EVENT]
>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT
3.FAULT CYCLE
4.SYSTEM
5.SET CHANGE
6.AVER.LOAD/MIN
7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR
8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY
9.DIGNOSTIC
10.PQM
11.ALARM CURRENT
12.CLEAR SAVED DATA
8.1. Operation Event

Operation event records max. 256 events. When Recloser operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation
status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.
[▼][▲] are used to check event. [1/256] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 STATUS
- CLOSE
- OPEN
- EARTH CLOSE (ECLOSE)
- EARTH OPEN (EOPEN)
 CONTROL
- MANUAL: Load break switch mechanical manual operation.
- LOCAL: Operation at local
- REMOTE: Remote operation.
Trigger Time
Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.
Trigger Capacity
Stores last 256 events.
8.2. Fault Event

Fault event records max 256 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault
current size and each phase fault records can be checked.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.
[001/256] FI RESULT [002/256] 2 EV [003/256] 1 EV

Target : AB F T Target : B F Target : A F
01/01/2010 01/01/2010 01/01/2010
00:03:01 00:02:00 00:01:00
ENT ENT
[002/256] 2 EV [003/256] 1 EV
A : 00000 B : 00000 A : 00000 B : 00000
C : 00000 N : 00000 C : 00000 N : 00000
Q : 00000 S : 00000 Q : 00000 S : 00000

[▼][▲] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check
fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [1/256] is the latest event
record.
Fault Event Information(EV)

Information before a fault occurring, is recorded. If control type is SWTYPE and coordinating with
other protection circuit breaker such as recloser, reclosing sequence is recorded.
SEQUENCE Sequence operation is recoded from one [FAULT].

TARGET Records the fault detect phase and fault direction.
001/256 Shows the latest event in order and records 256 events.
FAULT Max. current value is indicated when fault is occurred. Fault detect phase and
CURRENT fault current direction is indicated.
- F: Forward Fault or None Direction Fault detect
- R: Reverse Fault detect
Total Information(TO)
Fault type on each phase(Permanent/Instantaneous), time and max current are recorded.
SEQUENCE Record the fault detect phase and fault type.( P: Permanent fault, T: Temporary fault)
001/256 Shows the latest event in order and max.256 events are corded.
FAULT Indicates the max. current value and fault detect fault type when fault is occurred.
CURRENT
Trigger Source
 Taget Element
- A: A phase
- B: B phase
- C: C phase
- N: N phase
- S: SEF
- Q : NEQ
 Fault detect element
- T: TEMPORARY
- P: PERMANENT

 Detect direction
- F: FORWARD
- R: REVERSE
- Fault Current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase, SEF
Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary

Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD.
Captured waveform can be checked in interface software.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE” to confirm fault cycle summary.
[▼][▲] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 Fault wave captured time.
- PU: Pick up time.
- TR: Trip time.
- PU&TR: Picku up & Trip time
 Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase
 Fault Location [km]
*. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ON.
*. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “6.4.7. Fault Locator”.

Trigger Time
Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger Capacity
Maximum 32 events are recorded.
Recoder Cycle Length

20 cycles when 128 sampling
8.4. System Event

Maximum 2048 events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM” to confirm system events.
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/2048] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 Protection Element
 52A Contact
 Sequence status
 Front panel control
 AC supply
 External control
 Fail operation
 External input status
 System alarm
 Sleep Mode
 Gas Status

※. NOTE : Refer to “Appendix B. LOGIC BIT Attributes & Description” for more details
about trigger source.
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
Storage Capacity
8.5. Set Change Event

Maximum 100 Set change Event can be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.
[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [001/100] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 Changed set menu
- GLOBAL SETTING
- PRIMARY SETTING
- ALTERNATE SETTING
- EDITBANK SETTING
 Change method
- LOCAL: Set change at local
- REMOTE: Sec change in remote
- PROGRAM: Set change by Interface software.

Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity
8.6. Aver. Load/Min

Average load value is recorded every 15 minutes. Maximum 6144 values, it’s about 64 days events
can be recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / AVER. LOAD/MIN” to confirm aver. load/min events.
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press
[ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/6144] is the latest event
record.
Trigger Source
 Measured current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase
 Measured active power [kW]: 3 phases, A phase, B phase, C phase
 Measured reactive power [kVar]: 3phases, A phase, B phase, C phase
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 15min.
Storage Capacity

8.7. Peak. Load/Hour

Peak load event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up to 6144
events, it’s about 256 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PEAK. LOAD/HOUR” to confirm peak. load/hour events.
[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again.
[0001/6144] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.
Storage Capacity

8.8. Peak. Load/Day

Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 6144
events, it’s 6144 days events are recorded.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PEAK. LOAD/DAY” to confirm peak. load/day events.
[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again.
[0001/6144] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
Trigger Time
Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.
Storage Capacity

8.9. Diagnostic Event

Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 512 events.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnosticevents.
[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. [001/512] is the latest event record.
Trigger Source
 DSP Fail
 ADC Fail
 RTC Fail
 Memory Fail
 Flash-Rom Fail
 Circuit voltage Fail
 Globlal Setting Fail
 Primary Setting Fail
 Alternate Setting Fail
 Event Fail
 Count Fail
 DO Fail
 Close Fail
 Open Fail
※. NOTE : Refer to “Appendix B. LOGIC BIT Attributes & Description” for more details
about trigger source.
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Trigger type
Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
Storage Capacity
When Diagnostis Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following.
Table 8-1. Treatment Method when Diagnostis Fail is Occurred

No. Item Period Method
1 DSP Within 200msec Change to fault detect block
2 ADC 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block
3 RTC 1 hour, at booting Change the date to January 1st, 1970
4 Memory 1 hour, at booting Restart
At Flash-Rom reading and
5 Flash-Rom Restart
writing, at booting
6 Circuit voltage 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block
Change the Global setting value to
7 Global setting At setting change, at booting
Default value
Change the Primary setting value to
8 Primary setting At setting change, at booting
Default value
Change the Alternate setting value
9 Alternate setting At setting change, at booting
Default value
10 Event At event save and reading Event initialization
11 Count At counter writing and reading Counter initialization
12 DO signal 50msec Output power block
13 Close/Open At closing and opening Necessary to check in local
8.10. PQM
Power Quality Management(PQM) detect event is recorded up to 512 events.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM” to confirm peak. PQM events.
[▼][▲] button is used to check the event. [001/512] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source
 PQM detect element.
- Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)
- Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),
Long Time(LONG)
- Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG)
- Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH)
- Current Harmonic distortion(ITH)
- Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV)
- Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL)
- Current Unbalance(UBI)
- Source side Over Voltage(OVS)
- Load side Over Voltage(OVL)
- Source side Under Voltage(UVS)
- Load side Under Voltage(UVL)
- Under Frequency(UNF)
 PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase
 PQM element related measured value.
 PQM detect time(cycle)
Trigger Time
Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.
Storage Capacity

8.11. Alarm Current Event

Alarm current event is occurred by “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY or
ALTERNATE SETTING/ ALARM CURRENT” menu. Max. 512 events of alarm current event
can be recorded and indicated.
Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / ALARM CURRENT” menu to check the alarm current event.
[▼][▲] is used to check the event. [001/512] is the latest recorded event.
Trigger Source
 Taget element
- A: Phase A Alarm current
- B: Phase B Alarm current
- C: Phase C Alarm current
- N: Phase N Alarm current
 Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred
Trigger Time
Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.
Trigger type
Record the Alarm current event occurrence (HI/ASSERT) or extinction (LO/DEASSERT).
Trigger Capacity
Max. 512 events are saved.

8.12. Clear Saved Data

Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved data.
EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA
[CLEAR SAVED DATA] Clear Saved Data

>1.OPERATION
2.FAULT Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.
3.FAULT WAVE
4.SYSTEM If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
5.SET CHANGE
6.LOAD PROFILE message is displayed.
7.DIGNOSTIC
8.PQM
9.PQM WAVE
10.ALARM CURRENT 11. ABOVE ALL
11.ABOVE ALL
1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.
[EVENT CLEAR]
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

9. MAINTENANCE
Place the curser on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.
This menu displays Maintenance information.
This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.
[MAINTENANCE]
>1.COUNT
2.INTERRUT TIME
3.CONTACT WEAR
4.DATA RESET
5.CCU INFO
9.1. Count
Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.
[COUNT]
>1.CCU
2.OPERATION
3.FAULT
4.PQM
5.COMMUNICATION
9.1.1. CCU Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU” to confirm CCU(ETR300-R) count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU
[CCU] Restart Count

RESTART : 30
DIAGNOSTIC : 0 ETR300-R restart number is displayed.
Diagnostic Count
ETR300-R Diagnostic Count is displayed.

9.1.2. Operation Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / OPERATION” to confirm operation count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / OPERATION
[OPERATION] Recloser operation counter is displayed.

COUNT : 0
9.1.3. Fault Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT
Number of fault is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 3 pages.
[FAULT] 1/3
F.I TOTAL: 0 Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
TRIP: 0
H/C-LOCKOUT: 0
FAULT(1/3)
Total number of fault is displayed. Number of TRIP and number of
[FAULT] 2/3
TOT: 0 SEF: 0 Lockout are displayed.
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0 N : 0
FAULT-P(2/3)
Total number of PERMANENT fault and number of fault per phase
[FAULT] 3/3 are displayed.
TOT: 0 SEF: 0
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0 N : 0
FAULT-T(3/3)
Total number of TEMPORARY fault and number of fault per phase are
displayed.

9.1.4. PQM Count

This menu displays PQM related counter information, it has sub-menu as below.
[PQM COUNT]
>1.INTERRUT
2.SAG
3.SWELL
4.HARMONICS
5.CURR UNBALANCE
6.VOLT UNBALANCE
7.UNDER VOLTAGE
8.OVER VOLTAGE
9.UNDER FREQUNCY
9.1.4.1. INTERRUPT
Move to “MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT” to confirm interrup count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT
Number of Interruption is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
[INTERRUPT] 1/2
TOTAL: 0 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0
INTERRUPT(1/2)
Total number of Interruption and total number of interruption per
[INTERRUPT] 2/2
MOMENTARY : 0
phase are displayed.
TEMPORARY : 0
SUSTAINED : 0
INTERRUPT(2/2)
Number of fault per type is displayed on Interruption.
9.1.4.2. Sag
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG
Number of Sag is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and
[SAG] 1/2
TOTAL: 0 use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0
SAG(1/2)
Total number of Sag occurred and total number of Sag per phase are
displayed.
SAG(2/2)
Number of Sag per type is displayed.

9.1.4.3. Swell
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL” to confirm swell count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL
Number of Swell occurred is displayed. This COUNT menu consists
of 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
SWELL(1/2)
Total number of Swell and number of Swell per phase are displayed.
SWELL(2/2)
Number of Swell per type is displayed.
9.1.4.4. Harmonics
Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC” to confirm sag count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC
Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu
[VTHD] 1/2
TOTAL: 0 consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0
VTHD(1/2)
Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage
[ITHD] 2/2
TOTAL: 0 harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0
ITHD(2/2)
Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current
harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.
9.1.4.5. Current Unbalance

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE” to confirm current
unbalance count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE
[CURRENT UNBALANCE] Number of Current Unbalance occurred is displayed.

COUNT : 0

9.1.4.6. Voltage Unbalance

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” to confirm voltage
unbalance count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
[VOLTAGE UNBALANCE] Number of voltage unbalance occurred is displayed.

SOURCE SIDE : 0
LOAD SIDE : 0
SOURSE SIDE
Number of voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.
LOAD SIDE
Number of voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.
9.1.4.7. Under Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE” to confirm under voltage
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE
[VS-UNDER VOLT] 1/2 Number of under-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
dddddddTOTAL : 0
A : 0 B : 0 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
C : 0
VS-UNDER VOLT(1/2)
[VL-UNDER VOLT] 2/2 Total number of undervoltage at source side and number of
dddddddTOTAL : 0
A : 0 B : 0 undervoltage per phase are displayed.
C : 0
VL-UNDER VOLT (2/2)

Total number of undervoltage at load side and number of undervoltage
at load side per phase are displayed.

9.1.4.8. Over Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE” to confirm over voltage count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE
[VS-OVER VOLT] 1/2 Number of over-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2
dddddddTOTAL : 0
A : 0 B : 0 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
C : 0
VS-OVER VOLT(1/2)
[VL-OVER VOLT] 2/2 Total number of overvoltage at source side and number of
dddddddTOTAL : 0
A : 0 B : 0 undervoltage per phase are displayed.
C : 0
VL-OVER VOLT (2/2)

Total number of overvoltage at load side and number of overvoltage at
load side per phase are displayed.
9.1.4.9. Under Frequency

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / Under Frequency” to confirm under frequency
count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY
[UNDER FREQUENCY] Number of underfrequency is displayed.

COUNT : 0

9.1.5. Communication Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count.
MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION
[COMM-S1] 1/6 Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT
Rx Message: 0
Tx Message: 0 menu consists 6 pages. Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
Unsol Tx : 0
COMM-S1(1/6)
 Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of
[COMM-S1] 2/6
Rx CRC Err: 0 DNP3.0 Slave1.
Tx RETRY : 0
SBO TO : 0  Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of
DNP3.0 Slave1.
 Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message
[COMM-S1] 3/6 of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
D Conf TO : 0
A Conf TO : 0
COMM-S1(2/6)
 Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of
[COMM-S2] 4/6
DNP3.0 Slave 1.
Rx Message: 0  Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of
Tx Message: 0
Unsol Tx : 0 DNP3.0 Slave1.
 SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.
[COMM-S2] 5/6
Rx CRC Err: 0 COMM-S1(3/6)
Tx RETRY : 0
SBO TO : 0
 D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of
DNP3.0 Slave1.
 A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out
[COMM-S3] 6/6 number of DNP3.0 Slave1.
D Conf TO : 0
A Conf TO : 0
COMM-S2(4~6/6)
Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The
composition counter is same as DNP3.0 Slave 1.

9.2. Interrupt Time

Move to “MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME” to confirm interrupt time.
MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME
Accumulated interrupt time is displayed. This COUNT menu consists
[INTERRUP TIME] 1/2
TOTAL: 0 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0 N : 0
INTERRUPT TIME(1/2)
[INTERRUP TIME] 2/2
MOMENTARY : 0 Total accumulated time and accumulated time per phase are displayed.
TEMPORARY : 0
SUSTAINED : 0 Time unit is Cycle.
INTERRUPT TIME(2/2)
Accumulated time per interrupt type is displayed, time unit is cycle.
9.3. Contact Wear

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” to confirm contact wear.
MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR
[CONTACT WEAR-%] Displayes recloser contact wear in percentage.

A : 100.00
B : 100.00
C : 100.00

9.4. DATA RESET

Move to “MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data.
MAINTENACE / DATA RESET
[DATA RESET] Saved data reset

>1.CCU COUNT
2.OPERATION COUNT Select an item to delete and press[ENT] button.
3.FAULT COUNT
4.PQM COUNT If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS”
5.COM’ COUNT
6.COUNT ALL message is displayed.
7.INTERRUPT TIME
8.CONTACT WEAR
9.ENERGY
10.MAX DEMAND *. NOTE :
11.PEAK CURRENT
12.COMM BUFF 1) ‘OPERATION COUNT’ is reset by a set value in ‘MAIN MENU/
13.ABOVE ALL
GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION COUNT’.
[EVENT CLEAR] 2) ‘CONTACT WEAR’ is reset by a set value in ‘MAIN MENU/
EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR’.
3) Except ‘OPERATION COUNT’ and ‘CONTACT WEAR, all data
is reset for 0.
11. ABOVE ALL

1 ~ 10 item data are all reset.
9.5. CCU Information

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO” to confirm ccu information.
MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO
TYPE:ETR300-R03 Present ETR300-R information is displayed.

01:00000001 00000004
02:7d090161 02873f1f CCU information screen consists of 2 screen, first screen shows
03:0000b7ff
firmware option, second screen shows firmware version. Screen is
MPU Ver: 1.5 changed by [UP] [DOWN] key.
DSP Ver: 3.10
CPU Ver: 1.01

10. TIME
Place the curser on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.
TIME
[CURRENT TIME] Set present date and time.

2006/11/05 21:02:38
PRESS <ENT> TO SET

1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting.
2) To change a number, use [▲][▼] button and to move next item,
[SETTING TIME] press [ENT] button.
2006/11/05 21:02:38
USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER] 3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT].
PRESS <FUNC> : ABORT
[SAVE TIME]
2006/11/06 15;01:50
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE

11. STATUS
Place the curser on “STATUS” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This
menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[STATUS]
>1.RECLOSER
2.INPUT PORTS
3.OUTPUT PORTS
11.1. Recloser
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / RECLOSER”
STATUS/ RECLOSER
[RECLOSER] Present recloser and ETR300-R status are displayed.

>RECLOSER :TROUBLE
>PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.
>CONTROL : LOCAL
>RECLOSE :DISABLE
>PHA-PROTECT:DISABLE
>GND-PROTECT:DISABLE RECLOSER
>LOCKOUT :LOCKOUT
>POWER : ON Displays Circuit Breaker status.
>BATTERY : NORMAL
>BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE(Device in Trouble status)
>DOOR : CLOSE
>DNP ADDRESS: 1
>MASTER ADDR: 65534
>HANDLE LOCK: OCKOUT PANEL LOCK
>GAS : NORMAL
Displays panel lock status.
LOCK, UNLOCK
CONTROL
Operation control select is displayed.
REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE(Device in Trouble status)
RECLOSE
Display whether to use reclosing function.
DISABLE, ENABLE
PHA-PROTECT
Phase protection function status is displayed.
DISABLE, ENABLE

STATUS/ RECLOSER
GND-PROTECT
Ground protection function status is displayed.
DISABLE, ENABLE
LOCKOUT
Section operation status is displayed. RESET, RUNNING, LOCKOUT
POWER
External power supply status is displayed.
ON, OFF
BATTERY
Battery status is displayed.
NORMAL, FAIL
BAT’ CHARGER
Battery charger status is displayed.
NORMAL, FAIL
DOOR
Door status is displayed.
OPEN, CLOSE
DNP ADDRESS
ETR300-R DNP set address is displayed(0~65535).
MASTER ADDR
DNP Host initial address(0~65534:65535 is used for Broadcast)
GAS
Circuit breaker gas pressure status is displayed.
NORMAL, LOW

11.2. Input Ports

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS”
STATUS/ INPUT PORTS
[INPUT PORTS] Displays 28 input terminal(IN101 ~ IN108, IN201 ~ IN208 and IN301
IN 101 :LO/DEASSERT
IN 102 :LO/DEASSERT ~ IN312) status. IN301 ~ IN312 are the status of input ports in External
IN 103 :LO/DEASSERT
IN 104 :LO/DEASSERT I/O Unit ETIO10.
IN 105 :LO/DEASSERT
：
IN 312 : HI/ASSERT
Depending on input signal, “HI/ASSERT” or “LO/DEASSERT” is
displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.
NOTE
IN301 ~ IN312 shall be Ver 4.0 or higher of ETR300-R to be
indicated.
If the external I/O unit ETIO10 is not installed or “EX-IO?”
setting is set with “NO” in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS /
H/W OPTION” menu, “LO/DEASSERT” is displayed in
“IN301 ~ IN312”.

11.3. Output Ports

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS”
STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS
[OUTPUT PORTS] Displays 24 output terminal(OUT101 ~ OUT108, OUT201 ~ OUT208

OUT 101:LO/DEASSERT
OUT 102:LO/DEASSERT and OUT301 ~ OUT308) status. OUT301 ~ OUT308 are the status of
OUT 103:LO/DEASSERT
OUT 104:LO/DEASSERT output ports in External I/O Unit ETIO10.
OUT 105:LO/DEASSERT
：
OUT 308: HI/ASSERT
Depending on output signal, “HI/ASSERT” or “LO/DEASSERT” is
displayed.
[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.
NOTE
IN301 ~ IN312 shall be Ver 4.0 or higher of ETR300-R to be
indicated.
If the external I/O unit ETIO10 is not installed or “EX-IO?”
setting is set with “NO” in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS /
H/W OPTION” menu, “LO/DEASSERT” is displayed in
“OUT301 ~ OUT308”.

12. METERING
Place the curser on “MERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This
menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.
[METERING]
>1.CURRENT
2.VOLTAGE
3.FREQUENCY
4.POWER
5.ENERGY
6.DEMAND
7.UNBALANCE
8.HARMONICS
9.TRUE R.M.S
10.TD
11.CCU SEF
12.1. Metering Elements

12.1.1. Current
The following values are contained in the current metering.
 IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 IN : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)
 I1 : Indicates the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg°)
 I2: Indicates the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)
 3I0: Indicates the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)
 Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A)
 Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A)
 Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A)
 Peak IN : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A)
 Peak IQ : Displays the measured NEQ Peak current (A)

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT
Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed.
Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.
[CURRENT] [CURRENT] [SEQUENCE ‘I’] [PEAK ‘I’]

IA: 0A ∠ 0° IN: 0A ∠ 0° I1: 0A ∠ 0° IA: 0A IB: 0A
IB: 0.00A ∠ 0° SEF: 0.00A ∠ 0° I2: 0.00A ∠ 0° IC: 0A IN: 0A
IC: 0.00A ∠ 0° 3I0: 0.00A ∠ 0° IQ: 0A
12.1.2. Voltage
The following values are contained in the voltage metering.
 VS-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at source side, are displayed(㎸, deg°).
 VS-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(㎸, deg°).
 VS-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(㎸,
deg°).
 VL-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at load side, are displayed (㎸, deg°).
 VL-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (㎸, deg°).
 VL-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (㎸,
deg°).
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE
[VS-PN] [VS-PP] [VS-SEQ]

A : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° AB : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° V1 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°
B : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° BC : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° V2 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°
C : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° CA : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° 3V0: 0.00 kV ∠ 0°
[VL-SEQ] [VL-PP] [VL-PN]

V1 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° AB : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° A : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°
V2 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° BC : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° B : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°
3V0: 0.00 kV ∠ 0° CA : 0.00 kV ∠ 0° C : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°
Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check it.

12.1.3. Frequency
The following values are contained in the frequency metering.
 Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated.
 Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
[FREQUENCY] Frequency Display
Source: 0.00Hz
Load : 0.00Hz
12.1.4. Power
The following values are contained in the power metering.
 POWER-KW/KVAR/KVA: Per phase, active power/ reactive power/ apparent power are
displayed.
 POWER FACTOR: Power factor per phase is displayed.
 3PH POWER: 3phase active power, reactive power, apparent power and power factor are
indicated.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”

MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER
Per phase, power and power factor are displayed.
Use [▼][▲] button to check the power metering information.
[POWER- KW/KVAR/KVA] [POWER FACTOR] [3PH POWER]

A: 0 0 0 A: 0.0 KVA : 0 PF: 0.0
B: 0 0 0 B: 0.0 KW : 0
C: 0 0 0 C: 0.0 KVAR: 0

12.1.5. Energy
The following values are contained in the energy metering.
 POS’ W/H(10kWh): Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction
are indicated. The indicated power is 10kWh per 1 count.
 POS’ V/H(10kVar): Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction
are indicated. The indicated power is 10kVar per 1 count.
 NEG’ W/H(10kWh): Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction
are indicated. The indicated power is 10kWh per 1 count.
 NEG’ V/H(10kVar): Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction
are indicated. The indicated power is 10kVar per 1 count.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY
Energy is displayed Use [▼][▲] button to check the energy metering
[POS’ W/H(10kWh)]
Pa: 0 Pb: 0 information.
Pc: 0 P3: 0
S:01/01/10 00:00:00
The last line “S” of each page indicates the time that have started the
present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in
[POS’ V/H(10kVar)] 0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA
Pa: 0 Pb: 0
Pc: 0 P3: 0 RESET/ ENERGY” menu.
S:01/01/10 00:00:00
[NEG’ W/H(10kWh)]
Pa: 0 Pb: 0
Pc: 0 P3: 0
S:01/01/10 00:00:00
[NEG’ V/H(10kVar)]
Pa: 0 Pb: 0
Pc: 0 P3: 0
S:01/01/10 00:00:00

12.1.6. Demand Current and Power

ETR300-R measures and indicates the following Demand current and power items;
 DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase
sequence Demand current.
 PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current
max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value.
 PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current
max. value of phase B and the time that have measured the max. value.
 PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current
max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value.
 PHASE N CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase N, Demand current
max. value of phase N and the time that have measured the max. value.
 PHASE I2 CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence,
Demand current max. value of negative phase sequence and the time that have measured the
max. value.
 PHASE A REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A, Demand
active power max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value.
 PHASE B REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B, Demand
active power max. value of phaseBA and the time that have measured the max. value.
 PHASE C REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C, Demand
active power max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value.
 3P REAL POWER(kW): Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase, Demand
active power max. value of three-phase and the time that have measured the max. value.
 P-A REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase A,
Demand active power max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value.
 P-B REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase B,
Demand active power max. value of phase B and the time that have measured the max. value.
 P-C REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase C,
Demand reactive power max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value.
 3P REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present three-phase,
Demand reactive power max. value of three-phase and the time that have measured the max.
value.
※. NOTE ) The aboive Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be
reset by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND”
menu.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”

MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND
[DEMAND CURRENT] [PHASE I2 CURRENT] [PHASE A REAL POWER] [3P REACTIVE POWER]
A: 0000 A B: 0000 A DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 KW DEMAND: 0 KVar
C: 0000 A N: 0000 A MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 KW MAX : 0 KVar
NEG: 0000 A 01/01/2010 00:00:00 01/01/2010 00:00:00 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE N CURRENT]

DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A
MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A
01/01/2010 00:00:00 01/01/2010 00:00:00
[PHASE B CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT] [3P REAL POWER (KW)] [P-A REACTIVE POWER]
DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 KW DEMAND: 0 KVar
MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 KW MAX : 0 KVar
01/01/2010 00:00:00 01/01/2010 00:00:00 01/01/2010 00:00:00 01/01/2010 00:00:00
Demand current and power is indicated. Use [▼][▲] key to check the Demand metering
information.
12.1.7. Unbalance
The following values are contained in the unbalance metering.
 SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.
 LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.
 CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE
[UNBALANCE- %] Unbalance are displayed.
SOURCE-VOLT: 0.00
LOAD-VOLT: 0.00
CURRENT: 0.00

12.1.8. Harmonics
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS”
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS
[%V-Harm. A/B/C] [%V-Harm. A/B/C] [%V-Harm. A/B/C]

THD : 0.0 0.0 0.0 04H : 0.0 0.0 0.0 31H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
02H : 0.0 0.0 0.0 05H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
03H : 0.0 0.0 0.0 06H : 0.0 0.0 0.0
[%I-Harm. 31H] [%I-Harm. 02H] [%I-Harm. THD]

A : 0.0 B : 0.0 A : 0.0 B : 0.0 A : 0.0 B : 0.0
C : 0.0 N : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0
Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check harmonic rate
information.
12.1.9. True R.M.S

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S
[VOLTAGE-TURE R.M.S]
TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use
A : 000 V [▼][▲] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.
B : 000 V
C : 000 V
12.1.10. TD Monitoring
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING”
MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING
[TD MONITERRING] TD input value is displayed.
TD1: 00.0 TD2: 00.0
TD3: 00.0 TD4: 00.0
TD5: 00.0

12.1.11. CCU Reference

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CCU REF”
MAIN MENU / METERING / CCU REF
[CCU Ref] ETR300-R reference values are displayed.
+5V: 4.9 -5V:-4.8
Temp: 37°

13. INSTALLATION
13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
E
T
R
3
0
0
Control & Communication Unit -R02
RUN
DIAG/ERROR
RX / TX
AC SUPPLY
CHARGER
BATTERY
REVERSE POWER
CLPU ON
FUN
METER
79 RESET
79 CYCLE
EVENT SET ESC 79 LOCKOUT
51 FAST/DELAY
ENT
50 HIGH CURRENT
A FAULT
LAMP TEST
B FAULT
BATT' TRIP FI
CHECK RESET C FAULT
TEST
GROUND
SEF
PROTECTION REMOTE 27 UNDER

ENABLED ENABLED
59 OVER
GROUND ALTERNATE 25 SYNCHRONISM
ENABLED SETTINGS
81 FREQUENCY
VA / VR
SEF
ENABLED ENABLED VB / VS
VC / VT
RECLOSE
L
1
MANUAL LOCK
L
2
LOW PRESSURE
L
3
CONTROL HOT LINE

LOCKED TAG
L
4
CLOSE OPEN
PORT F
Figure 13-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
User Interface Door

User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull the
handle.
Control Power Switch
After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power,
right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control.
AC Power Outlet
For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for
safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 13-5. Inner Structure”

13.2. Vent and Outer Cover
Figure 13-2. Air Vent and Outer Cover
Outer Cover
It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle. The
gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm.
Air Vent
To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are on left and right side
covered with Outer Cover.

13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
Figure 13-3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan

 ETR300-R has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type.
 Small size is available for EVR-1, EVR-2, Large size is available for EVR3.
 Large size is able to make “User available Space” larger, the space unit is referred to “Figure
13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions”
 Standard for EVR1, EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size.
 EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.5㎸) / EVR2 (27㎸) / EVR3 (38㎸)
 For installation on a Pole, the lifting hole is indicated.
 Weight of ETR300-R small size is 85㎏ and large size is 90㎏.
 ETR300-R should be fixed top and bottom with 16㎜(5/8") Bolt.
 There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning
hardware.
 The diameter of the hole is 22㎜(0.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series can
be extended.

13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-4. Earth Wiring Diagram
 After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.

 Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0.470") diameter.
 Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from ETR300-R Earth Terminal must be connected to the
ground.

13.5. Inner Structure
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
USL-5 SR4
RAIL HOLDER
RAIL HOLDER
END COVER
Figure 13-5. Inner Structure
Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker)

Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac.
Heater
Optional Heater is 40W
Battery
Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (＋) screwdriver for replacement.
Fuse
TF1 is for circuit protection, refers to (see “13.18. Fuses”)
Terminal Block
Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user.
User Available Space
Space for additional hardware connection. Installation and space size refers to “Figure 13-6.
Mount Accessories Dimensions”.

13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
 Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.
 On Base plate, 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.
 Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6㎜ (4”) to 177.8㎜ (7”)

13.7. User-Available DC Power

Table 13-1. User-Available DC Power
Voltage Rating Voltage Range Maximum Power output Positions
24Vdc 20∼25Vdc 30W Continuous Side Panel PTR J
15Vdc 14.0∼15.5Vdc 70W 10second (J1, J2-VCC/+)
12Vdc 11.0∼12.5Vdc Short 1second (J3, J4-GND/-)
Standard Voltage : 24Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating
 30W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W, additional power
should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Input of the additional power is
referred to “Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses”
 Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315＂). With using (＋) PTR J
connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12.
 To change Voltage ratings, disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3, and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI
(24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). Be sure of the voltage rating due to disassembly.
 When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there is a
fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.

13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses
Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses

 Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block.

 Standard AC Power is 220Vac.
 Terminal 2, 3 are connected to AC power supply through receptacle. Terminal 4, 5 are earth
terminal.
 Terminal 6,7 can be used for AC power supply branching by user. Terminal 6 is connected with
TF1 fuse for protection and Terminal 5 is connected directly to AC power.
 TF1 fuse(10A) is connected with 220Vac output and 40W heater. User shall be noticed.
 In AC line connection, blue wired line is for Neutral, white wired line is for Phase wire, green
wired line is for the ground.
 Terminal 14,15,16 are spare terminal for use of recloser 52 control.
 Terminal 1 is for user use. For more terminal requirement, User-available space is provided.
52 Contact Auxiliary Specs

Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0.6A / 250Vdc 0.3A

13.9. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type
Figure 13-8. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type

 Wiring diagram of ETR300-R standard.

 PTR E has different system wirings depending on User system. In “Figure 13-8. ETR300-R
Wiring Diagram - CVD Type”, PTR E is marked as Earthing System. PTR F, G is Voltage
Input Connector. “Figure 13-8. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type” is CVD (Capacitor
Voltage Divider) type VT type is standard and CVD type is for optional. CVD type and VT
type are not exchangeable.

13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram

Current IG is connected with Side Panel
IN(E07,E08) in Earthing System.
SEF(E09,E10) should be connected, so
E10
Ise
E09
called “JUMPER”
E08
IN
E07
E06
I03
Current IN should be connected with
E05
E04
I02
SEF(E09,E10) of Side Panel in.
E03
E02
Non Earthing System.
I01
E01
IN(E07,E08) should be connected to each
other.
E10
Ise
E09
E08
IN
E07
E06
I03
E05
E04
I02
E03
E02
I01
E01
Figure 13-9. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation”
CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.

13.12. CVD Wiring Diagram
G08
V0
G07
G06
V23
G05
G04
V22
G03
G02
V21
G01
F06
V13
F05
F04
V12
F03
F02
V11
F01
Figure 13-10. CVD Wiring Diagram
 CVD (Capacitor Voltage Divider) measures Voltage with using Capacitor installed in each
Bushing of Recloser.
 CVD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.
 Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase
rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.
 Option CVD 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ Class
 Load Side CVD of EPR model is optional.

13.13. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation
Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation
 For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.
 “Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and
Recloser.
 If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and CVD wiring
in side panel to be matched.
 ETR300-R Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.

13.14. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function Pin Function
A C.T Phase C a 52 common(Auxiliary)
B C.T Phase B b 52b(Auxiliary)
C C.T Phase A c 52a(Auxiliary)
D C.T Common(G) d Close and Trip Coil Common
E CVD Source Phase C e Close and Trip Coil Common
F CVD Source Phase B f Close and Trip Coil Common
G CVD Source Phase A g Close Coil
H Ground(CVD Load side Phase T) h Close Coil
J Ground(CVD Load side Phase S) j Close Coil
K CVD Load side Phase R k not connected
L Pressure Sensor Output(controller input) m Trip Coil
M not connected n not connected
N Pressure Sensor Power AGND p Trip Coil
P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc r Trip Coil
R Cable shield and Ground s not connected
S not connected
T Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)
U Recloser Status Common(24Vdc)
V Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip)
W Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)
X not connected
Z not connected
 Control ETR300-R Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female)

 Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male)
 Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”)
 Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”

Figure 13-12. Control Receptacle
“Figure 13-12. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control ETR300-R.

13.15. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling

 Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling.
 For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.
Following notices are suggested.
 Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing.
 Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this to
complete connection.
 Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control
Cable assembling
Figure 13-13. Recloser Receptacle Figure 13-14. Control Cable
13.16. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function
A AC Power Input
B AC Power Input (Neutral)
C not connected
Standard Input Voltage of Control ETR300-R

is 220Vac. Figure 13-15. Power Receptacle

13.17. AC Power Cable

TYPE : MS22-2S(Female)
Cable Length : 2C-3.5㎟ 6meter(236")
A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase)
B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral)
C PIN : not connected
13.18. Fuses
Table 13-4. Fuses
Rating /
Positions Dimensions Purpose
External AC - Power Input
0.25"×1.25" AC Power outlet and Heater

Terminal Block TF1 10A
(6.385×31.75)㎜ User Available AC Power
Inside Relay Module F1 0.197"×0.787"

5A User-Available DC Power
(Power board) (5×20)㎜

13.19. Battery and Control run time

Table 13-5. Battery Specs
Maker Global & Yuasa Battery Co., Ltd.(Made in Korea)
Battery Type ES18-12
Nominal Voltage 12V
Nominal capacity 18 amp-hours
Dimension 181×76×167㎜(7.126×3×6.575")
Self-discharge Versus Time 12 month at +20℃(+68℉), 5 month at +40℃(+104℉)
Service life Time 3∼5 years at +20℃(+68℉), 1 years at +50℃(+122℉)
Battery Connector(CN11) Molex Connector 3191-2R
Controller run time 30 hours at +20℃(+68℉), 15 hours at -25℃(-13℉)
Recharge Time 60 hours at +20℃(+68℉)
 Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series.

 Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to
battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time,
turn NFB1 “OFF” without disconnecting Harness connector.
 The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per

month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of
+20℃(+68℉). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient

temperature.
 The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an
battery can be empirically determined from “Figure 13-17.

Open Circuit Voltage” Figure 13-16. Battery
 Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove
Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery
voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is
0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance.
 24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through

NFB1(Battery Switch).
Relay Module supplies through PTR K Connector in Side Panel
and UPS Module supplies through CN5 Connector of UPS
Module. Figure 13-17. Open Circuit Voltage

13.20. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to
prevent over-recharge.
Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has.
Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power switch)
before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10 in series with CD
Ammeter.
Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(±0.5V)

Charge Current : 300mAdc(±50mAdc)
13.21. Battery Change

Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and is
connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver.
For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and
black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake.
For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire later.
Reference “Figure 13-16. Battery”

13.22. Communication Cables

1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer
Figure 13-18. Cable CC201 (connect to computer)
2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-19. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)
3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-20. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)

13.23. Hardware Block Diagram
1
2
3
RJ45
XPORT
Figure 13-21. Hardware Block Diagram

13.24. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
Figure 13-22. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
CC Close Coil TC Trip Coil

IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor C Capacitor
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
 Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1 in UPS module.

 C1 is used for Trip power.
 Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is “ON”. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power
to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.

13.25. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close
Figure 13-23. UPS Module Block Diagram
 UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc.
 Trip and Close capacitor are charged at the same time but during trip and close, it does not
affect to each other.
 UPS module operates with 24Vac power or spare battery.
 Transformer in ETR300-R connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac.
 Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs over
20Vdc.

13.26. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-24. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram

 CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
 The capacity of CVD is 20㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.

13.27. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)

Table 13-6. Current Transformer (CT)
Description Pin Function
A C.T Phase C
CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard) B C.T Phase B
CT Resistance < 5 C C.T Phase A
D C.T Common(G)
13.28. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD)

Table 13-7. Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD)
E CVD Source Phase C
EVR RECLOSER F CVD Source Phase B
1) Pin R is connected to Ground. G CVD Source Phase A
2) CVD Capacitance : 20㎊ H CVD Load side Phase T
3) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between J CVD Load side Phase S
Phase and Ground. K CVD Load side Phase R
R Cable shield and Ground
EPR RECLOSER E CVD Source Phase C
1) Pin R is connected to Ground. F CVD Source Phase B
2) CVD Capacitance of Source Phase : 26㎊ G CVD Source Phase A
3) CVD Capacitance of Load side Phase : 20㎊ K CVD Load side Phase R
(Option) R Cable shield and Ground
4) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between
Phase and Ground.
 For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC
Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.
 Voltage Measuring Method 1
measure MOV voltage.
(measure a voltage between MOV arms)
 Voltage Measuring Method 2
Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and
measure MOV voltage. Figure 13-25. CVD Wiring Diagram

13.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)

13.29.1. TYPE1 Sensor
It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005.
Table 13-8. ETR300 Pressure Sensor

L Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+12Vdc±0.5 %) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density).
4) “Figure 13-26. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage”
shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage depending on
pressure.
5) ETR300-R has 0.5bar at 20 ℃
Figure 13-26. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage

13.29.2. TYPE2 Sensor

It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY, 2005.
Table 13-9. ETR300 Pressure Sensor

L Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
Output voltage(Vdc)
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
-0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Pressure (bar)
Figure 13-27. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage

13.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact

Table 13-10. 52 contact and 69 contact
T 69b(Monitored locked)
U Common(52 and 69)
V 52b(Monitored Trip)
69 is b Contact when unlocked. W 52a(Monitored Close)
a 52 common(Auxiliary)
b 52b(Auxiliary)
c 52a(Auxiliary)
13.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil

Table 13-11. Trip and Close Coil
d Close and Trip Coil Common
1) Pin d, e and f are combined as one line. e Close and Trip Coil Common
2) Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one f Close and Trip Coil Common
line g Close Coil
3) Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one h Close Coil
line. j Close Coil
4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5 m Trip Coil
5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2 p Trip Coil
r Trip Coil

13.32. Recloser Test Kit

1) RTS 2010 Model tests ETR300-R by Fault Simulation.
2) RTS 2010 can display Full Sequence of Trip time, Trip current, Interval on LCD screen and
also can variously test Calibration Mode, OCR Mode, External Mode, Manual Mode.
Figure 13-28. Recloser Test Kit
Standard Ratings and Features
Table 13-12. Standard Ratings and Features

Classification Rating and Characteristic
1.5Arms ×3ch (Burden below 1Ω)
Current output 4.5Arms×1ch (3ch Parallel)
Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.1mA)
7Vrms ×4ch (Burden over 1㏀)
Voltage output
Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.002V)
BI01~02: DC12~150V or Dry contact(User select)
Binary input
BI03~04: DC12~150V(Pulse below 1sec)
BO01~04
Binary output
130mA/350V, ON Resistance (below 35 Ω)
Time Accuracy ±5ms
Weight 6kg(RTS2010), 1.2kg(cable), 6kg AL Case
325×150×270 (RTS2010)
Dimensions
521×258×348 (AL CASE)
Control Interface Cable 2M
Operating Temperature -20∼+50℃
AC180~264 @ Select AC220V
Power input AC 90~132 @ Select AC110V
Max. 150W

14. MAINTANANCE
14.1. Warning Events
In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects.
Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/2)

EVENT TEXT ETR300 USER’ RECOMMENDED
EVENT EXPLANATION
(LCD) ACTION ACTION
1. Check AC Power NFB
2. Check AC Power fuse
ACFAIL External power FAIL -
3. Check AC supply, ensure AC -
connector is securely connected
1. Check AC supply
Battery charge circuit 2. Check Battery charge Voltage
CHGBAD -
FAIL (Value 23V) (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)
3. Replace Analog Module
SYSTEM POWER 1. Check AC Power NFB
Battery Discharge
2. Check AC Power fuse
(Value ≦ 21V)
BATBAD - 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC
* Related Setting : TD
connector is securely connected
Monitor>TD1-1
4. Replace Battery charge T.R
NO Battery
(Value < 19V) 1. Check battery NFB
NOBATT -
* Related Setting : TD 2. Check battery connection
Monitor>TD1-2
Power down mode
No problem
POWER DOWN (Value < 19V and ACFAIL) Controller
PWDOWN 1. Check AC supply
MODE * Related Setting : TD power turn off
2. Check battery
Monitor>TD1-2
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
connected
GASLOW Gas pressure Low - 2. Check Control cable fault
3. Replace Main Processing Module
GAS STATUS
4. Replace Recloser.
* applied only gas
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
insulation type
connected
GASHIGH Gas pressure High - 2. Check Control cable fault
3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser
SYSRST System restarted - No problem

SYSTEM
RESTART
CLDRST Cold Restarted - No problem
No problem
SETTING GLOBAL, PRI’
* But somebody modified the setting
(Refer to SET GRP or Setting Changed -
data.
CHANGE Event) ALT’ GRP

Table 14-1. Warning Events(2/2)

EVENT TEXT USER’ RECOMMENDED
EVENT EXPLANATION ETR300 ACTION
(LCD) ACTION
Detail message are
System error detected 1.Check the diagnostic event
SELFTERR recorded in diagnostic
while booting 2.Refer to EVENT TEXT
event
1. Execute System Restart
Restored default setting
DIGGSET Global setting error 2. Execute default setting
by itself
Restored default setting
DIGPSET Group setting error 2. Execute default setting
by itself
SELF TEST
All protection and
DIGSPU DSP board link error measurement are
2. Replace DSP Module
disabled
1. Execute All Clear Event
Recorded events format
DIGEVT Cleared events by itself 2. Execute System Restart
error
1. Execute default PLC
Restored default PLC
DIGLOG PLC data error 2. Execute System Restart
by itself
1. Check the close/trip module
2. Check the receptacle pin
DIGCL Close fail -
3. Replace the hardware or update
TRIP firmware
& CLOSE 1. Check the close/trip module
2. Check the receptacle pin
DIGOP Trip fail -
3. Replace the hardware or update
firmware

14.2. Malfunction Events

The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and what
they indicate. It also suggest steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was generated.
Table 14-2. Malfunction Events

EVENT DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION
1. Connection state of control cable
2. control Box inside CN2 connection state check
- Table 13-2 - Figure 4-12 - Figure 13-8

Control Cable
- Figure 13-12 - Reference
3. control Box inside CN4 connection state check
OPERATION FAIL Operation Fail - Figure 4-10 - Figure 13-8 Reference
1.That control switch point of contact check
2. control Box inside FUSE state check
Etc.. - Figure 13-7 Reference
3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser
1 Connection state of control cable
2. control Box inside Current connection state
Current measure check
Fail of current & - Figure 13-12 Reference

Control Cable
voltage measurement 1 Connection state of control cable
2. control Box inside Voltage connection state

Voltage
check
meaasure
- Figure 13-12 Reference

15. PLC function

ETR300-R has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to
control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During
ETR300-R running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet user’s need.
PLC is programmed in “ETR300 Interface Software”.
Figure 15-1. PLC Screen

01 ETR300R Manual Control Ver1.48 20140321

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

01 ETR300R Manual Control Ver1.48 20140321

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Release Date: Mar. 2014 / Manual Revision: 1.

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

[Apr. 2012] Ver1.40

[May. 2012] Ver1.41

[Aug. 2012] Ver1.42

[Aug. 2012] Ver1.43

[Sep. 2012] Ver1.44

[Dec. 2012] Ver1.45

[Dec. 2012] Ver1.46

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

[Apr. 2013] Ver1.47

[Mar. 2014] Ver1.48

3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 24

5. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 33

6. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 53

6.1. System ............................................................................................................................... 53

7. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 141

8. EVENT RECORDER ................................................................................................. 235

9. MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ 249

10. TIME .......................................................................................................................... 258

11.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 262

12. METERING ............................................................................................................... 263

13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 271

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii

14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 302

15. PLC function.............................................................................................................. 305

viii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

1.2. Summary of Features

 Battery Automatic Load Test

NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.

Control Voltage Input

User available DC power Output - Option

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Standard

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

Current Transformer Inputs (CT)

Control Inputs - Option

Control Output Contacts - Option

Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts

2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Surge Withstand Capability

 Control Operating Temperature

2.3. Metering Accuracy

Harmonic metering : ±5%

2.4. Protection Elements

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection

Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Cold Load Pickup Blocking

Phase Directional Control

Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control

Negative Directional Control

Under/Over Voltage 1/2 Protection

Close Wait Reset Time .............................................. 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Hot Line Tag

Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear

Sequence Coordination Control

F.I Reset Method

Time Delay for Manual Close

Battery Automatic Load Test

Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)

TD1 Rate ................................................................... 1 to 200 in steps of 1

Live Load Blocking

Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%